



Produced by Giovanni Fini, Chris Curnow and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
file was produced from images generously made available
by The Internet Archive)







                         TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:

—Obvious print and punctuation errors were corrected.

—Bold text have been rendered as =bold text=.




[Illustration:
  POPULAR
  PASTIMES
  For

  Field & Fireside.]




                           Popular Pastimes

                                  FOR

                          Field and Fireside,

                                  OR

                     Amusements for Young and Old.

                         CAREFULLY COMPILED BY

                             AUNT CARRIE.

                          SPRINGFIELD, MASS.:

                   PUBLISHED BY MILTON BRADLEY & CO.
                                 1867.




      Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1866, by

                       MILTON BRADLEY & COMPANY,

      In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the District
                           of Massachusetts.


  SAMUEL BOWLES AND COMPANY.
  Printers, Binders and Electrotypers.




                              AUNT CARRIE

                               DEDICATES

                         TO HER YOUNG FRIENDS

                              THIS BOOK,

                     IN THE HOPE THAT IT WILL ADD
                               TO THEIR

                            HOME PLEASURES.




Preface.


I WOULD like to make a few suggestions on “home influence,” before I
commence a list of amusements. They may be superfluous; if so, I trust
you will pardon me.

All parents, I am sure, must feel a deep interest in this subject, and
I think will agree with me that judicious praise is quite as necessary
in the training of a child as wholesome correction. But if we wish
our children to have a genuine love for us, and our homes, we must
sympathize with them, and never forget we were once children, and loved
childish things.

Mothers have by nature far more sympathy and patience than most
fathers. Some fathers are apt to think that home is only a place in
which to eat, sleep, and be generally comfortable; but as to giving
any of their valuable time to entertaining their own children, why,
the very idea is preposterous! A wife is presuming to expect it! Let
me appeal to your selfish instincts. You all wish to be loved and
revered, and are gratified if your children are attentive to your
comforts. Can you expect such manifestations, unless you set them an
example, and prove by a real interest in their pleasures, that you
sincerely love them? Is it not better to devote at least an hour a day
to your children, than to spend every moment in earning money for them,
which, unless you rightly direct and train them, will surely prove
their ruin?

There is no time in the day when home is so pleasant as at twilight,
or in the early evening hour. Then all are gathered (or should
be) together at home. In the country it is after tea; in cities,
particularly New York, it is after dinner. Then, I entreat you, fathers
and mothers, assemble your children around you, devote your time for
an hour or two in being children with them, join heartily in all their
plays; let them tell what has interested them during the day; draw them
out, and encourage them to open their little hearts freely and confide
in you.

Some think it childish and silly to play games. Yet if we would only
keep our hearts young and happy, we should retain our youth longer, and
love our friends and homes better. A good hearty laugh is wholesome.

Mothers, I intreat you to train your own children. Do not leave them to
servants. Hire them to relieve you of the care of your house, and to
do your sewing; but give your time to your children. “Verily, you will
have your reward.”

I have compiled this book to assist you in your home amusements. May it
carry to your home circle that spirit of enjoyment which is natural to
the young heart, and which should not be absent from the more mature.




                               Contents.


                                                                    PAGE

  PREFACE,                                                             v


  CROQUET.

  MATERIALS used in the Game—Preparation of the
  Ground—Choice of Sides—General Principles of the
  Game—Arrangement of the Bridges—Diagrams—Rules of
  the Game—Striking the Ball—Running a Bridge—Striking
  Out—The Rover—Roquet—Croquet and Roquet-Croquet—The
  Flinch—Suggestions to Beginners—Hints to Players—Carpet
  Croquet—The Board Game—Vocabulary of Terms,                         13


  BASE BALL.

  Origin of the Game—Rules adopted by “the National
  Association of Base Ball Players”—Selection and Measuring of
  Ground—Diagram—Pitcher’s Point and Home Base—Use of the
  Bat—Description of the Game—The Catcher—The Pitcher—The
  Short Stop—First Base—Second Base—Third Base—Left
  Field—Center Field—Right Field—The Umpire—The Scorer,               42


  ARCHERY.

  Position of the Targets—Attitude in
  Shooting—Directions—Bows—Targets,                                   64


  GARDENING AND FLOWERS.

  Benefit of Children’s Gardens—The Woods—How to Plant
  Seeds—Ferneries—Ivies—Pressed Flowers—How to Plant and Grow
  Strawberries—Grapes—Designs for Flowers—To Produce various
  Flowers from one stem—To Preserve Roses till Winter,                67


  ILLUMINATION.

  Materials—Lists of Selected Colors—Brushes—Coloring—Table
  of Colors and Mixed Tints—Design,                                   85


  HOUSE AND HOME ARTS.

  Decalcomanie,                                                       98

  Engraved Boxes,                                                    101

  Coral Flowers and Baskets,                                         102

  Imitation of Inlaid Ivory,                                         103

  Alum Baskets,                                                      103

  Painting on Glass,                                                 104

  Painting on Velvet,                                                106

  Casting in Plaster, Sulphur, &c.,                                  109

  Leather Work,                                                      111

  Cigar Boxes made Useful,                                           116

  Potichimanie,                                                      118

  Ornaments in Rice Shell Work,                                      120

  Allspice Baskets,                                                  124

  Rice or Shell Baskets,                                             125

  Wafer Baskets,                                                     125

  Impressions of Butterflies,                                        126

  How to take Impressions of Leaves,                                 126

  Paper Landscapes,                                                  127


  NATURAL MAGIC.

  The Æolian Harp,                                                   128

  The Magic of Acoustics,                                            129

  How Sound travels through a Solid,                                 129

  Singular Example of Superstition,                                  130

  Theory of the Voice,                                               131

  The visibly growing Acorn,                                         132


  DANCING.

  Pop goes the Weasel,                                               134

  Lancers,                                                           134

  Le Prince Imperial Quadrille,                                      137

  Common Cotillion,                                                  139

  Basket Dance,                                                      140

  White Cockade,                                                     141

  The Waltz and Polka Quadrille,                                     141

  Sir Roger De Coverly or Virginia Reel,                             141

  Nine-Pin Dance,                                                    142

  Caledonian Quadrilles,                                             142


  DRAMATIC AMUSEMENTS.

  General Directions for Private Theatricals,                        144

  Dramatic Reading Clubs,                                            147

  Charades and how to Act them—Examples,                             149

  Tableaux Vivants,                                                  154


  THE SIBYL.

  Sibylline Leaves—The Fiat of Fate—Flower Fate—Fate Box,            156


  THE PUZZLER.

  Conundrums,                                                        160

  Enigmas, Charades and Riddles,                                     162

  An Enigmatical Dinner,                                             168

  Paradoxes and Puzzles,                                             170

  Arithmetical Problems,                                             173

  Answers to Conundrums,                                             175

  Answers to Enigmas and Charades,                                   176

  Answers to Paradoxes and Puzzles,                                  178

  Answers to Arithmetical Problems,                                  180


  GAMES FOR OLD AND YOUNG.

  Blind Man’s Buff,                                                  182

  Shadow Buff,                                                       183

  Blind Man’s Wand,                                                  183

  Chinese Shadows,                                                   184

  The Comical Concert,                                               184

  The Menagerie,                                                     186

  Quaker Meeting,                                                    186

  Resemblances,                                                      187

  Put in a Word,                                                     188

  Proverbs,                                                          188

  Game of Characters,                                                189

  Lawyer,                                                            190

  Consequences,                                                      190

  Fox and Geese,                                                     191

  Stage-Coach,                                                       192

  Hunt the Fox,                                                      193

  Sneezing,                                                          193

  The Ready Writer,                                                  193

  Rhyming Words in Pantomime,                                        194

  Exhibition of the Modern Giant,                                    196

  The Shadow at Command,                                             197

  The Wizard of the East,                                            198

  How to Bring a Person down upon a Feather,                         199

  The Apparent Impossibility,                                        200

  The Turned Head,                                                   200

  Statuary,                                                          201

  “He can do little who can’t do this,”                              201

  “Brother, I’m Bobbed,”                                             202

  “How do You Like it? When do You Like it? And Where
  will You Put it?”                                                  202

  The Bird Catcher,                                                  203

  Questions and Answers,                                             206

  The Magic Wand,                                                    206

  The Rhyming Game,                                                  207

  The Game of Twenty Questions,                                      208

  Game of Photograph,                                                210

  York and Lancaster, or the War of the Roses,                       212

  Post-Office,                                                       214

  Hand-writing on the Wall,                                          214

  Graces,                                                            215

  Family Newspaper,                                                  216


  GAMES OF MEMORY.

  Grand Panjandrum,                                                  218

  “Le Jardin de ma tante,”                                           219

  A Good Fat Hand                                                    219


  PARLOR GAMES.

  Squails,                                                           222

  Parlor, or Carpet Bowls,                                           226

  The Union Game, or Red, White and Blue,                            227

  Zoetrope, or Wheel of Life,                                        229

  Grecian Games,                                                     230

  Jack-Straws,                                                       231


  GAMES FOR LITTLE CHILDREN.

  Dance, Thumbkin, Dance!                                            233

  Uncle John,                                                        234

  Mother Goose,                                                      234

  Clap out and Clap in,                                              235

  Fingers and Thumbs,                                                236

  “You are nothing but a Goose,”                                     237

  Buzz,                                                              238

  The Puzzle Wall,                                                   239

  Dolls,                                                             240

  Boys,                                                              241

  Play-Ground Rhymes,                                                243

  Forfeits,                                                          244




Croquet.


CROQUET has been for several years one of the most popular pastimes
in England, and is now very justly receiving a large and rapidly
increasing share of attention in this country. It is unmistakably a
game of _science_, in which the brain, as well as the muscles and
nerves, has an essential part to perform,—thus very closely resembling
billiards, to which game it is in some respects superior, in that it
is a more social game, and gives an opportunity for healthful open air
exercise.

Unlike most of out-of-door sports, it does not require the possession
of great strength or powers of endurance, or severe muscular exertion
on the part of the player. Excellence in it is almost equally
attainable to the weakly and delicate as to the healthy and robust.
Old and young meet on its arena on more nearly equal terms than in any
other known game of skill. A “correct eye,” steady hands and nerves,
and good judgment, are the essential qualifications for a good player,
and the possession of these advantages of course is not dependent upon
the age, sex, or condition of the person.

And it may perhaps be considered as the chief excellence of this game
that it gives this opportunity, which very few other games, combining
scientific play and physical exercise, afford, for persons of the
opposite sexes and disparity of age to join in one common amusement.
It should be a matter of congratulation to all to see the rapidly
increasing popularity of any healthful open air sport in this country.

We predict for Croquet a success wider in this than it has reached in
any other country. When we work or fight, we work and fight harder than
any other people, and we should be as enthusiastic in our play.

In preparing this chapter on Croquet we have endeavored to explain the
general principles of the game, and to present a code of rules, simple,
concise, and shorn as far as possible of technicalities of expression,
but comprehensive enough to include all points necessary to a thorough
understanding of the game.

In Rules of the Game, explanatory remarks are enclosed in brackets.


MATERIALS OF THE GAME.

A COMPLETE set of Croquet consists of _eight balls, eight mallets, ten
iron bridges, and two posts_.

The balls should be about ten inches in circumference, perfectly
spherical, and should weigh about eight ounces. They should be
designated by different colors, either by painting the entire surface
of the ball, or by a stripe of the color merely. But the first method
is much to be preferred, as a ball needs all the protection it can have
to preserve it from the effects of the weather, and for this purpose
nothing is better than good oil paint and varnish. There is a universal
predisposition towards large balls by all novices in the game; but
experience will invariably give the preference to a ball not more than
ten inches in circumference, if of rock maple or birch, and if of
box-wood, not more than nine and one-half inches.

[Illustration: MALLET.]

The mallet head should be about 2⅜ inches in diameter, and 4¼ inches
long, shaped somewhat like a dice-box; and the handle 33 inches long,
15/16 of an inch in diameter in the largest part, and ⅝ of an inch in
the smallest. It is customary to paint some portion of the mallets to
correspond to the colors on the balls. This is a very great advantage
in distinguishing the different players and assisting the memory to
connect them with their respective balls, and we much prefer it; but
some players prefer to leave the mallets undistinguished, and to allow
each player to select his own,—choosing such weight, size and length
as he may desire—and perhaps there is no objection to this. A feeble
or delicate person may not be able to play as well with a mallet of the
standard size as his opponent, and thus will be upon an unequal footing
with him at the outset; while, if each selects such as is suitable to
his or her condition, all will be satisfactorily equipped, and, of
course, upon equal terms, as far as the implements are concerned. For
balls and mallet heads good rock maple is the most desirable of all
our native woods, and hickory is the best for mallet handles. Box-wood
is very good for mallet heads, but is too heavy for balls. Box-wood
mallet heads and good rock maple balls, well painted, make an elegant
and superior set, and are preferable to a complete box-wood set,
while rosewood and lignum-vitæ balls are little better than iron, and
entirely unfit to use.

The bridges should be made of iron wire about 5/16 of an inch in
diameter, in form like an ox-bow. The width of the bridge should be
equal to the circumference of the ball, and the hight such that when
firmly set it will stand out of the ground a distance equal to its
width. They should be uniform in color. White is best, as it is more
easily seen, and contrasts more pleasingly with the green of the turf.
Some have adopted the practice of painting them of different colors,
but the reason assigned seems not to be a good one, and experience
almost unanimously pronounces in favor of a uniform light color.

[Illustration: THE BRIDGE.]

One manufacturer has adopted and patented the happy idea of galvanizing
or plating the iron bridges with zinc, which gives them a _permanent_
light color, and at the same time perfectly preserves them from rust.

Some writers assert that withs or firkin hoops answer very well for
bridges. They may answer as a very poor substitute, but a good croquet
player would no sooner play with such materials than a billiard player
with a slack rope for a cushion or an umbrella for a cue. In many of
the scientific “shots” of the game, the player calculates upon the
rigidity of the bridges, and an iron bridge, when set in sandy soil,
is at best none too rigid; and with loose or springy bridges the game
loses much of its attraction to a good player.

[Illustration: THE POST.]

The posts should be about 28 inches long, 1½ inches in diameter in the
largest part, and pointed so as to be driven into the ground. They
should have rings painted on them corresponding to the colors of the
balls, and of such width that the bottom ring will be as high from
the ground as the top of the bridges. Thus, supposing the post to be
28 inches long, commencing at the top, make each ring 1¼ inches wide.
This will occupy 10 inches, and hence allow the posts to be driven
into the ground 8 inches, and still have the lowest color so high from
the turf that it can be easily seen from any portion of the ground. The
order of the colors on the post is not essential so long as the light
and dark colors alternate; but the two uppermost colors belong to the
chiefs of the two sides, and therefore most properly should be black
and white, as those are the best representatives of dark and light
colors. The exact arrangement of the succeeding colors is immaterial,
but the following is very good, commencing at the top:

                 1. Black.          │         5. Brown.
                 2. White.          │         6. Red.
                 3. Blue.           │         7. Green.
                 4. Yellow.         │         8. Pink.

As the order of the colors on the posts governs that of the play, and
since those on each side play alternately, it follows that in a game
of eight the dark balls, black, blue, brown, and green, are matched
against the light ones, white, yellow, red and pink.

Many devices have been suggested for marking the bridges when run, such
as clips or markers, painting the bridges different colors, &c., &c.,
but they have all proved to be useless, as a player who is interested
in the game will remember his own position more easily than he will
remember to change the marker.


THE GROUND.

IN contemplating the preparation of a Croquet ground, the first
question that occurs is, how much and what kind of ground is necessary.
The size of the ground, as well as the distance between the bridges,
is governed very much by the taste and accommodation of the owner.

A model Croquet ground has been defined as an elliptical field one
hundred feet long and sixty feet wide, with the bridges from nine to
twelve feet apart; but persons possessed of only a limited plot of
ground need not conclude that the above dimensions are absolutely
necessary, for a very interesting game may be played on ground not
more than sixty feet long and thirty feet wide, with the bridges from
six to eight feet apart. The bounds may be imaginary lines defined by
corner bounds, or they may be walks or other natural bounds suggested
by the nature of the ground; or if a plot is prepared expressly for the
purpose, a ditch about eight inches wide, and six inches deep, well
turfed is probably the best bound that can be made.

A smooth, closely cut turf is always to be chosen, and is improved
by a thorough rolling with a very heavy roller, or, if that is not
available, a few hours’ work with a heavy mall will bring the ground
into very good condition. Next to having the turf smooth, the most
important point is to have the ground level; and yet a very good game
can be played on an uneven or sloping ground, if in making the strokes
and determining the necessary force and direction, a proper calculation
is made with reference to the condition of the surface over which the
ball is to pass. It in fact shows more skill to play a good game upon a
poor ground than upon a perfect one.


GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE GAME.

TWO players being designated captains or chiefs, one for each side,
sides are chosen in the usual manner. The privilege of first choice
of players is very conveniently decided between the chiefs by each
placing his ball under the first bridge and striking for the starting
post; the one who thus drives his ball nearest the post gaining the
first choice.

The chief who has the first choice takes the ball corresponding in
color with the top of the post, and the other chief the next ball
according to the order of the colors on the posts, while the remaining
balls are given to the other players in the order in which they are
chosen. (See remark under Rule II.)

[Illustration]

Eight persons can play, but a game of four or six is the most
interesting. If four or more play, each player uses but one ball; but
if only two play, the game is improved by each player taking two balls
and playing them alternately as usual. If there be an odd number of
players—either three, five or seven—the players play against each
other individually, or one person takes two balls and plays each in its
proper turn.

Assuming that each player has a ball and a mallet, that the bridges
are arranged in either of the three positions given in diagrams Nos.
1, 2 and 3, we now come to the mode of playing the game. The object is
to drive the balls through all the bridges, in the direction indicated
by the dotted lines on the diagrams, and to strike the two posts. The
side, all of whose members succeed in performing this feat first, wins
the game. Now although this is the chief object of the game, yet the
act from which it derives its title, to wit: “Croquet,” is of much
greater importance than would at first be imagined. If a player hit
with his ball any of the others, he is allowed to place his own against
the ball he has struck, and setting his foot upon his own ball, he hits
it with the mallet, and the force of the blow drives off the other
ball while the playing ball remains stationary. As a player is allowed
to Croquet either friend or foe, it is evident that he can do a great
deal of damage or service, according to his inclination, since he is at
liberty to drive the ball in any direction he pleases.

The Roquet-Croquet is an operation still more interesting than the
Croquet as it is susceptible of much greater skill in its execution.
This is accomplished the same as the Croquet, except that instead of
holding one ball firmly by placing the foot upon it, both balls are
left free to be driven together by the blow of the mallet. By practice
and a skillful placing of the balls a stroke may be made that will
cause the balls to diverge in any forward directions the player may
desire.

In commencing a game, the first chief places his ball one-third the
distance from the starting post to the first bridge, and endeavors,
by striking it with the end of his mallet’s head, to drive it through
the first bridge. If he succeeds, he continues his turn and attempts
to send the ball through the second bridge, and then through the
third, for driving the ball through a bridge, or hitting another ball,
generally imparts the privilege of an additional stroke.

When one ball driven by a blow of the mallet hits another, it is said
to make _Roquet_ on that ball.

When the first player, who should be black, has missed, white goes on,
and the other players follow in the order of the colors on the posts,
and very soon comes the opportunity to use the great advantages of the
Croquet and Roquet-Croquet. Often when a player has his ball in a good
position in front of a bridge, another will hit it, and then by Croquet
or Roquet-Croquet drive it to the other end of the ground, compelling
it perhaps to take two or three turns before it can regain its former
position. Occasionally two or three balls lie close together, and one
is struck by a ball which was some distance off. The player is now
allowed to place his ball by the side of the one it has struck, thus
gaining position near the others, so that after croqueting it he is
almost sure of hitting the others.

As an example of the use of the _Roquet-Croquet_, we will take diagram
No. 1, and suppose that white plays with success through the first
two bridges, and that black lies somewhere beyond the second bridge.
Now if there was no other ball near, it would be impossible for white
to continue to play and pass through the third bridge, because it
will require one stroke to get in position for that bridge: but if
white can _Roquet_ black, then she can _Roquet-Croquet_ with black up
in front of the third bridge, and then, as the Roquet gives another
stroke, play through the third bridge and perhaps through the fourth
and fifth. If below the fifth she should find, say the brown ball,
to _Roquet-Croquet_ with, it would be possible to get in front of
No. 6, and then down to the turning post and hitting that return up
through No. 6. Here the brown ball may again be roqueted, and then
roquet-croqueted, into position for No. 8, and so on. This of course
could only happen if _white_ was an extra player and the other balls
were in very favorable positions, but it serves as an illustration
of the use of this very valuable stroke. The player who reaches the
turning-post first, has great advantages for a time, for as soon as
he touches it, he commences his return journey, and meeting the other
players on their way to the farthest point of their journey, he is able
to croquet them and considerably impede their progress.

When a player has passed through all the bridges, he becomes what is
called in the technical language of Croquet, a rover, and is privileged
to rove about all over the ground, croqueting his friends and foes.
It is therefore obvious that a good player can prove, when thus
situated, of immense advantage to his side, and should generally avoid
hitting the starting post till all on his side have passed through
the last bridge. The excitement towards the end of the game, often
becomes intense, and each stroke is watched with the keenest interest.
Gradually, one by one, the players hit the post, until perhaps only two
remain, and now occurs an opportunity for skillful play. The object
of both is first to hit the post, and failing in that, to keep as far
off his adversary as he can. Each endeavors, at the same time drawing
nearer to the great object in view, to keep the post between his and
the other ball. At length one plays at the post, misses it, and sends
his ball near his adversary, who first hits it, next croquets it away,
and then strikes the post, and wins the victory.


ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRIDGES.

Diagram No. 1.

THIS arrangement of the bridges, which is the simplest of the three we
have drawn, is the one which we recommend for all eight handed games,
or for beginners.

[Illustration: DIAGRAM No. 1.]

The figures marked on this diagram are intended merely to furnish a
relative scale of distances. Thus with these distances the posts are 53
feet apart, which is perhaps more than is desirable, unless the ground
is very perfect, or the players experts.

The course of the ball is indicated by the dotted lines, and the arrows
show the direction in which the balls proceed on the round. It will be
observed that bridge No. 3 is to the left of No. 2. As represented in
this diagram, bridges 3 and 10 are set a little in advance of 2, and 6
a little in advance of 5 and 8. Some players prefer that 10, 2 and 3
should be in a straight line, and the same with 8, 6 and 5. We prefer
to have 3 and 10 enough in advance of 2 to make it just possible for an
expert by a _very_ superior stroke to run No. 2 and get position for
No. 3 at one blow, and the same with 5, 6 and 8. In short, we would
have the arrangement such that it is not absolutely _impossible_ for
a player to make the grand round in one tour, without the aid of the
roquet. This of course would very rarely be accomplished,—never,
except by extraordinarily skillful play,—yet it should be made
possible, but very difficult.

[Illustration: DIAGRAM No. 2.]


Diagram No. 2.

In this the same number of bridges are used, as in the first diagram;
but the bridges numbered respectively 4 and 9, instead of being placed
parallel to the others, are now at right angles to them; thus in
playing from 3 to 4, the ball must keep to the left of 4, and then
pass through it, from the outside of the game; a much more difficult
arrangement than the first, and somewhat more difficult than the third,
although at first sight it may not appear so.


Diagram No. 3.

In this, the third diagram, it will be seen that the two center side
bridges are done away with, and that one is placed in the center of
the ground instead; but although in the play we now require one bridge
less than in the former diagram, yet the player will have to pass
through the same number of bridges as before, since he travels twice
through the bridge in the center, once on his way to the turning post,
and once on his return. This is the best arrangement of bridges for a
four-handed game. As the player’s knowledge of Croquet increases, many
other positions will suggest themselves; but those we have presented
are the simplest, and are the diagrams in general use at the present
time. Some authors recommend the invariable use of diagram No. 1, as
being sufficiently difficult, especially when bridges 10, 2 and 3 are
on a line.

[Illustration: DIAGRAM No. 3.]


RULES OF THE GAME.


Striking the Ball.

I. AT the commencement of the game the ball should be placed on a line
drawn from the starting post to the center of the first bridge, and at
a distance from the starting post, equal to one-third the distance from
the post to the bridge.

[The rule usually given, i. e., to place the ball a mallet’s length
from the post is very well for a large ground where the distance from
post to bridge is nine or ten feet, but for a small ground it brings
the ball too near the first bridge.]

1. In striking, the mallet should be used with one hand, and the
striker should stand on one side of, and not behind the ball.

2. The ball _must be struck_ and not pushed—a push never being
allowable under any circumstances; and the blow must be given with the
_face_—never with the side—of the mallet head.

[A ball can never get into such a position on a croquet-ground that
it cannot be struck in some direction, and if it is in a bad position
it is either the fault or the misfortune of the player owning the
ball—which he is not to be allowed to rectify by a push, for that
would sometimes be rewarding bad play.]

3. Whenever the mallet hits the ball, if it moves it however slightly,
it must be considered a stroke.

4. The player may if he wholly miss his ball, strike at it again.

II. The game is opened by the chief holding the ball corresponding in
color with the top of the post, and the players on the two sides follow
alternately according to the order of the colors on the posts.

[The playing must necessarily be in the order of the colors on the
post. But on some grounds the chief is allowed to assign the balls to
the several players on his side according to his own choice; thus
according to this rule the chief is not compelled to play the first
ball. We do not advise this practice as there is generally some real
or fancied difference in the mallets and hence a chief is liable to
offend some one in the distribution of the materials. There are other
objections which we have not space to discuss.]

1. A player who misses the first bridge is called a booby, and at his
next turn must strike his ball from the position to which it last
rolled.

[The above rule is based upon the almost universal practice of the best
players in this country. The following is gaining favor in England: “A
ball missing the first bridge must be immediately picked up and played
from the starting spot, at its next turn.” Both practices have peculiar
advantages over the other, which we have not space to discuss.]

2. A roquet made _upon_, or _by_, a booby does not entitle the player
to an extra stroke; neither can a booby croquet or be croqueted.

3. If any ball is played out of its proper turn and discovered before
the play of another ball has commenced, the misplayed ball may be
returned to its original place, or permitted to remain in that to which
it has rolled, at the option of the chief of the opposing side. But
if the mistake is discovered before the player has finished his turn
and the misplay be allowed, the misplayer shall be permitted to finish
his turn. If the chief does not permit the misplay, the misplayed ball
shall be returned to its original place, and any damages sustained or
advantages gained by either side shall be canceled. If the misplay
is not discovered before the play of another ball commences, or is
allowed, the misplayer cannot use his next turn as he has anticipated
it.

4. If a player use a wrong ball, all the balls moved by such play must
be returned to their former position, and the misplayer lose his turn.


Running a Bridge.

III. A player continues to play so long as he makes a point in the game.

1. Making a point is running one or more bridges, striking the
turning-post in order, or performing the roquet (except on a booby, or
on a ball the second time in one tour without making an intervening
_step_.)

2. A player is allowed but one extra stroke, even though he make roquet
and run one or more bridges at one stroke.

3. If a player makes two steps at one stroke, he may take position one
mallet’s length or less, in any direction from where the ball rested.

4. If a player makes three steps at one stroke, he may take position as
above up to two mallet lengths or less.

IV. The bridges must be passed through in their regular order in the
direction of the course. (This is called running a bridge.)

1. A ball runs a bridge when it passes through it in order and course,
by a direct blow, by roquet, roquet-croquet, croquet or concussion.
Hence, for a player to drive his ball through a bridge out of its
regular order, or from the wrong side counts no more than to pass over
any other part of the field.

2. A ball is not through its bridge when the handle of the mallet laid
across the two piers of the bridge upon the side from whence the ball
came, touches the ball without moving the bridge.

3. A ball passing under its bridge in the wrong direction is not in
position to run the bridge until it has passed clear through according
to the foregoing rule.

4. A ball lying under a bridge is not in position for that bridge
if it has been so placed by the hand for the purpose of croquet or
roquet-croquet, no matter from what position it may have been taken.

[If the ball was taken from the back of the bridge, it would not be in
position, having come from the wrong side, as above. Now if it should
be allowed that a ball may be taken from the front of the bridge and
placed under the bridge without losing position, as would at first seem
proper, then the question immediately arises as to a ball when taken
from a position directly on a line with the two piers of the bridge,
thus coming from neither front nor back. This question can rarely be
settled without dispute, to avoid which we have considered the adoption
of the above rule as most judicious.]

V. Tolling the _turning_ post is in all respects equivalent to running
a bridge, but the post may be tolled from any quarter.


Striking Out.

VI. A ball, after it has run all the bridges, may hit the starting post
either by a blow from its owner’s mallet, by roquet, roquet-croquet,
croquet or concussion, and is then a _dead ball_, and must be
_immediately_ removed from the field.

1. A player who having run all the bridges strikes the starting post,
is out of the game, his turn is omitted, and the play goes on as
before. If, instead of striking the post, he continues to play, he is
called a _rover_.

2. When all the balls on one side have made the grand round and hit the
starting post, that side has won the game.

[Some authors on Croquet require the ball to be placed on the _spot_ or
starting point before continuing play as a rover. But this rule seems
to be entirely arbitrary—useless—and to have been adopted for no
sufficient reason.]


The Rover.

VII. If the roquet-croquet is allowed to all players alike, the rover
is governed entirely by the same laws as other players.

1. Therefore, a rover having completed the grand round, and having no
other steps to make (except _stepping out_, when of course his play
ceases,) can only acquire the right to continuance of play by the
roquet. He may (after roquet upon it) croquet or roquet-croquet each
ball once only during a tour. Roquet upon a ball the second time during
a tour does not entitle him to a continuance of play.


Roquet.

VIII. A ball roquets another when it comes in contact with it by a
direct blow of the mallet, or rebounds upon it after the blow, from any
fixed obstacle of the ground or from another ball.

1. A ball having roqueted another ball, except a booby, is at liberty
to croquet or roquet-croquet it or proceed on its round; providing that
the playing ball has not already in that tour roqueted that same ball
since making a step on the round.

2. A ball may roquet another ball twice between two consecutive steps,
but the second roquet does not entitle the player to a continuance of
play.

3. Any player in his turn is at liberty at any time to make roquet on
_any_ ball on the ground.

4. Roquet does not entitle a booby to a continuance of play.

5. Roquet on a booby does not entitle the playing ball to a continuance
of play.

6. A ball having made roquet and declined the croquet, may continue its
play either from the position to which it has rolled after the roquet,
or from the side of the roqueted ball.

7. If a ball roquet another and thereby gain the privilege of croquet,
and afterwards, at the same blow, run a bridge; it may croquet the
roqueted ball, then proceed to roquet it again, then croquet again and
proceed on its round; or waiving either or both croquets, or the last
roquet and croquet, may proceed on its round.

[Thus supposing the playing ball roquets a ball that it has not
roqueted since making a step, and _afterwards_ at the same blow runs a
bridge; it of course has a right to croquet the roqueted ball; then as
that roquet was made _before_ the playing ball run its bridge there is
no reason why it cannot again roquet and croquet the same ball. But had
the playing ball _first_ run a bridge and afterwards at the same blow
roqueted a ball then it can have but one croquet according to Rule IX.]

8. The continuance of play is gained by virtue of the roquet, and not
of the croquet. The croquet is merely a privilege consequent upon the
roquet. Therefore to waive a croquet does not terminate the play.
This principle once fixed in the mind will avoid much confusion in
understanding and interpreting the rules.

[One author on Croquet, assumes to propound a set of rules on double
points which are entirely new and at variance with all previously
established principles of the game, inasmuch as they allow a player
to waive any point made or privilege gained. It is an established
fact in Croquet that a player may waive any _privilege_ that he has
acquired—but it is also as well established that a _step_ once made
can not be taken back. The beauty of Croquet is in a great degree due
to its simplicity, and the granting of the above right to players adds
one-half to the difficulties of the game, without adding in the least
to its interest. A game of Croquet in which all the players except
the rover are denied the privilege of roquet-croquet, and in which
the right to waive a step is introduced, becomes at once twice as
intricate, requires double the rules to explain it, and loses one-half
its interest.]


The Croquet and Roquet-Croquet.

IX. A player may croquet or roquet-croquet any number of balls
consecutively; but he can croquet or roquet-croquet only those balls on
which he has made roquet, and roquet on the same ball the second time
in one tour without an intervening step does not entitle the player to
a croquet.

1. If a player in the act of croqueting does not _separate_ the balls,
he is at liberty to take the stroke over again.

[Instead of the above the following rule is often given. A croquet is
completed when the mallet makes a perceptible (that is an audible) blow
against the croqueting ball, whether that to be croqueted move from its
place or not. This rule gives rise to frequent disputes whether the
blow was perceptible or not, and is not as generally acceptable as the
one we have given.]

2. If a player in executing the roquet-croquet does not move the
croqueted ball from its position, his tour of play ceases, unless by
the same stroke he makes a point.

[If it is in dispute whether or not the ball has been moved as above
required, the question shall be decided by the umpire if there be one,
if not, by the chief of the side opposing the player. Some authors
allow the roquet-croquet to the rover only—but as it is one of the
most scientific operations of the game, the majority of players are
not willing to give it exclusively to the rover, especially when it is
considered that a person who is able to become an early rover, will
naturally have advantage enough without any extra favors. Further,
the argument that the universal use of the roquet-croquet tends to
perceptibly prolong the game has been proved by actual test to be
without foundation.]

3. If a ball is croqueted either through its own bridge or upon the
turning or starting post when in order, a point so made holds good.

4. In making ricochet the player is at liberty to croquet either a part
or all of the balls roqueted; but the order of croquet must be that of
the ricochet,—the player, however, has only one additional stroke, and
not one for each ball he has roqueted.

5. If a ball when croqueted or driven through its own bridge from the
rear roll back through the bridge, it has not run that bridge.

[This rule is based upon the principle that all questions as to
position can only be satisfactorily determined when the ball is not in
motion. In the case put it would frequently be impossible to decide
whether the ball when it began to roll back was in position or not.]

X. The laws that govern Croquet all apply to Roquet-Croquet, except as
to points for which special rules are herein given.


The Flinch.

XI. If a ball flinch in the execution of the croquet, it is considered
as merely an accidental roquet-croquet, and subject to the same laws.
In this case of course any point made or advantage gained by either
ball holds good.

[By adopting this rule all unpleasant difference of opinion as to the
proper positions of the balls is avoided, and as the origin of the
roquet-croquet was this very practice of placing the foot lightly
upon the playing ball and then allowing both balls to be moved
together—there seems to be no objection to the rule.]

1. The above rule only applies in a game where the roquet-croquet is
allowed to all players.

2. In case the roquet-croquet is only allowed to the rover, the
following rule applies: If the player’s ball flinch in executing the
croquet, he forfeits the remainder of his tour, and no point made by a
flinching ball is valid, and the balls are considered as accidentally
displaced and are replaced in accordance with the rule applying to
accidentally displaced balls.

XII. A ball accidentally displaced must be returned, by the chief of
the side opposed to the person displacing it, to the place where it was
lying before the play proceeds.

XIII. If a ball be hit off the ground it is to be placed _at once_,
and before the play proceeds, twelve inches within the limit of the
boundary and at a point nearest to where it stopped, which of course
causes the ball to be brought in _square_ with the boundary.

XIV. If a ball in its progress over the ground, be interrupted by the
person or mallet of an enemy the ball may be placed by the chief of the
side owning the ball, in such position as he may judge it would have
rested had it not been interrupted in its progress. If interrupted by
the person or mallet of a friend the ball may be placed by the chief
of the _opposing side_ in such position as he may judge it would have
rested.

_A person not taking part in the game, should never be within the
bounds of a croquet ground when a game is in progress_—but should such
person accidentally be in such a position and either displace a ball,
or interrupt it in its progress—such person shall be considered as an
enemy to the owner of the ball—and the ball be replaced according to
rules XII. and XIV.


SUGGESTIONS TO BEGINNERS.

KEEP YOUR TEMPER—_and remember when your turn comes_.

Make good use of the privilege of croquet and roquet-croquet, and not
consider it the sole object of the game to run the bridges,—and yet it
is not well to too much neglect the bridges, as they must all be run
before you can become a rover.

Practice the roquet-croquet whenever an opportunity offers, as it is
susceptible of more scientific playing than any other stroke.

Accustom yourself to be guided strictly according to established rules
as far as you are informed on the subject.

Do not attempt to use a kind of push and call it a stroke although it
may not be expressly forbidden in some manual of croquet.

Avoid acquiring the habit of standing behind the ball and holding
the mallet in a perpendicular position with both hands when making
a stroke, even though you play with those who do not object to
the practice, as it will not be allowed on any well-regulated
croquet ground. In making a stroke grasp your mallet firmly; strike
squarely—take care that your wrist does not turn or twist, (unless
you wish to give a twist to your ball,) and after getting your aim
look rather at your mark than at your ball when giving the blow. After
calculating distance, direction, &c., there is no more use in looking
at your ball except to be sure you can hit it, than in throwing a
stone, to look at your hand, rather than the mark.

If the enemy have an expert rover it is generally advisable to use
every effort to strike him out.

As an offset to this method of play it is often advisable to neglect to
make the last bridge till near the close of the game, as in this way
you can venture as near the starting post as you please without the
fear of being deaded.

It is often the case that you and an enemy may both be in position for
the last bridge. In such a case as a general rule roquet him, then
croquet or roquet-croquet through the bridge, roquet again and croquet
him against the starting post, thus depriving the other side of a
rover, and gaining the advantage of bringing two of your own side into
consecutive play.

Leave your own ball as near your friend and as far from an enemy as
possible.

Accustom yourself as much as possible to strike with one hand, as it is
much more graceful, and many players allow no other blow.

The ladies will very much oblige all their associates in croquet by
avoiding long dresses, which are continually dragging the balls about
over the ground greatly to the annoyance of the players and disturbance
of the game.

To the gentlemen we would say it is no proof of skill in executing the
croquet, to swing your mallet with both hands, and give a blow hard
enough to kill an ox. If you want to do that sort of thing—it would be
more agreeable to all concerned for you to go off alone somewhere and
split wood. An easy skillful stroke will send a ball anywhere within
the bounds, and a ball out of bounds may be brought in, so nothing
is gained by “sledge hammering,” except injuring the implements,
irritating the players and delaying the game.

In executing the roquet-croquet the stroke may be varied so as to
produce three very different results. First, if it is desirable to have
the secondary ball go much further than your own, strike a _sharp_,
_quick_ blow, proportioned in force to the distance you wish your own
ball to go, checking the force the instant the mallet hits the ball.
Secondly, if you wish to send both balls along together strike a more
sweeping blow, (not a push) permitting the mallet to have its full
swing. The difference in these two blows is much more easily discovered
by the player than described with the pen.

The third stroke may partake of the nature of either of the above, but
differs in the fact that the blow of the mallet is not delivered in a
line with the centers of the two balls, but partially to one side of
the rear ball, thus producing the splitting stroke, i. e., sending the
two balls in courses diverging from each other. This is much the most
difficult stroke of the three.

In procuring a set of croquet materials be sure that you know what you
want, or else buy a set manufactured by some recognized manufacturer.
It may seem a very simple thing to have a set of mallets, &c., made
from a description, but having tried the experiment we can testify that
to procure suitable lumber—well seasoned, have mallets well shaped,
the handles serviceable and not bungling, the balls _perfectly round_,
the bridges well formed and proportioned—and the painting brilliant
and properly arranged is a very difficult matter. An English author on
this subject says, “It was our fortune (or rather misfortune) when in
the country last year to take part in a game of Croquet played with
home-made materials. We only hope that it will never be our lot to play
with such things again. The mallets were so large they had to be used
as one would a scythe in mowing grass. The heads, instead of tapering
at the center, bore a great resemblance to an ale barrel on a small
scale, and were so large that if one attempted to croquet, one was sure
to hit one’s own foot instead of the ball. These, by-the-by, were any
shape but round. They bobbed up and down when in progress, and scarcely
ever went in the direction which it was intended for them to go....
Such was the unsatisfactory result of the combined labors of the local
carpenter and blacksmith. We therefore earnestly recommend our readers
to eschew the use of home-made sets of Croquet altogether.”

We endorse the foregoing statement, adding that responsible
manufacturers in various parts of the country are now furnishing
excellent sets of implements at a cheaper rate than individuals can get
up equally good sets for themselves. There is therefore no economy in
using a home-made set.

_Parlor Croquet_ is a very good substitute for the Lawn game, and may
be enjoyed in a winter day or evening very much as canned fruit or
preserved flowers are enjoyed as excellent and beautiful substitutes
for the delicious fruits of autumn and fragrant flowers of summer. But
as the canned fruit is insipid when used beside the fresh fruit of
autumn, so will the parlor game seem when attempted in the season of
the field sport. There are two kinds of Parlor Croquet—which may be
termed Carpet Croquet, and Table or Board Croquet.

The Carpet Croquet is played exactly like the field game and with
similar materials except that they are usually smaller, being reduced
in size in the same proportion that the space available in a room is
smaller than the Lawn Croquet ground. The same relative proportion
in the size of materials should be preserved as that given for the
materials of the Lawn game—assuming as a standard—a ball from 2¼
to 2½ inches in diameter. There are several ingenious devices for
fastening the bridges to the floor or carpet. Each one of those which
we have seen have some objections; but those which are fastened with
tacks are the simplest and we consider them the best.

_The Board game_ is played on a board of any convenient size—say five
feet long and three feet wide—covered with baize or flannel, and
surrounded by a ledge or thin strip projecting above the top surface
three-fourths of an inch.

The bridges and posts are set in this board in the same manner that the
larger bridges are set in the ground on the lawn. The balls should be
about one inch in diameter and may be of glass—but box-wood or ivory
are better.

The size of the mallets should be in proportion to that of the
balls—with handles about eight inches long.

The method of play is the same as in Lawn Croquet, except the croquet
is executed by placing the finger instead of the foot on the playing
ball. The rules are the same, except that, _first_, a player driving
his ball off the board terminates his tour of play by that stroke and
the ball must be placed immediately on the starting spot; _second_,
making two or more steps at one stroke does not entitle the player to
the privilege of taking position up to one or more mallet’s length.

The Board Croquet is the most popular for the reason that it does not
injure the furniture in any room, while the Carpet Croquet, although
more like the Lawn game, requires a large room—well cleared—or there
will soon be an action of Croquet _vs._ furniture.


VOCABULARY.

A BOOBY.—A ball that has attempted to run the first bridge and failed.

BRIDGES OR ARCHES.—The iron hoops or bows through which the balls pass.

BRIDGED BALL.—A ball that has run the first bridge.

CONCUSSION.—The displacement of a ball by another driven against it
by roquet, croquet, ricochet, or roquet-croquet, and not hit directly
either by the mallet or by the playing ball.

CROQUET.—(Pronounced Cró-kay.) The title of the game.

THE CROQUET.—Any ball having struck another, is taken up and placed in
contact with the ball it has struck. The player sets his foot upon his
own ball, pressing firmly so as to hold it in place, and with a blow
of his mallet, delivered upon his own ball, drives the other ball in
whatever direction he may desire. (See cut, page 19.)

DEAD BALL.—One that has made the grand round and hit the starting post.

DISTANCED.—A ball is distanced when at the termination of the game it
has not tolled the turning post.

DOWN.—The course from the turning post to the starting post.

A FLINCH.—When in the croquet, the playing ball is driven from under
the foot by the blow of the mallet, it is called a flinch.

FRONT OF A BRIDGE.—The side from which the ball must proceed in
running it, and with the central bridges is not constant, but is
decided in each case by the course of the ball under consideration.

GRAND ROUND.—A ball has made the grand round when it has run all the
bridges and tolled the turning post, and is then a rover.

PLAYING BALL.—The ball struck with the mallet.

POINT.—A player makes a point, by running a bridge or tolling a post,
or by roqueting a ball that he has not previously roqueted during the
tour—since making the step—or in other words, by roqueting a ball
under such circumstances as would entitle him to the privilege of the
croquet.

POSITION.—A ball is in position when it lies in front of its proper
bridge with a possibility of running it by a single blow of the mallet.

PROPER BRIDGE.—A bridge which it is a player’s turn to run next in
order is said to be that player’s bridge or his proper bridge.

PUSH.—A stroke in which the mallet remains in contact with the ball
after the instant of contact.

RICOCHET.—(Rick´-o-shay.)—A ball making Roquet on two or more balls
by the same blow of the mallet.

ROQUET.—(Ro´-kay.) A ball makes Roquet on another ball when proceeding
from a blow of the mallet it comes in contact with it either directly
or by rebounding from a fixed obstacle in the ground or from another
ball.

[Some writers define the Roquet as the contact of the playing ball with
another ball under such circumstances as to constitute a point. This is
merely a matter of choice regarding the facility of defining the other
operations of the game. We consider that our definition renders the
whole matter much the most simple.]

ROQUET-CROQUET.—The same as Croquet, except that the playing ball is
not held under the foot, but both balls are free to move in accordance
with the blow of the mallet.

A ROVER.—A ball that has run all the bridges and has not hit the
starting post.

STARTING POST.—The stake from which the play proceeds. See diagram.

A STEP.—Running a bridge, or tolling the turning post.

STRIKING OUT.—A ball struck against the starting post after having run
all the bridges in their proper order, is struck out, and is out of the
game.

THE TURNING POST.—The post opposite the starting post.

TOLLING THE TURNING POST.—Striking the turning post in its proper
order.

UNDER A BRIDGE.—A ball is under a bridge when if the mallet handle is
placed across the piers of the bridge on each side it will touch the
ball in both positions of the handle.

UP.—The course from the starting post to the turning post.

[Illustration]




Base Ball.


THE game of Base Ball is fast becoming with Americans what Cricket
has already become with the English, a national game. The sport is
both graceful and invigorating, and requires when properly played the
possession both of muscularity of body and strength of nerve. The
exercise attendant on this game develops all the physical powers and
calls into action every muscle and sinew in the human frame. There are
few sights more exhilarating and captivating than a well contested
match game between evenly matched clubs. Such a spectacle rarely fails
to draw admiring throngs, and to be considered a first class player
is a distinction of which any American youth may feel proud. As our
readers will find this subject fully treated in professional works, we
do not propose to enter into any lengthy description of the origin or
progress of the game of Base Ball. We shall therefore simply state that
this game was derived from the old English game of Rounders, reduced
to a system, and governed by rules and regulations adopted by “The
National Association of Base Ball Players,” held in New York, December
13, 1865. These regulations for the convenience of our readers we here
insert.

[Illustration]


RULES OF THE GAME.

SECTION 1. The ball must weigh not less than five and one-half, nor
more than five and three-fourths ounces avoirdupois. It must measure
not less than nine and one-half, nor more than nine and three-fourths
inches in circumference. It must be composed of India rubber and yarn,
and covered with leather, and, in all match games, shall be furnished
by the challenging club, and become the property of the winning club as
a trophy of victory.

SEC. 2. The bat must be round, and must not exceed two and a half
inches in diameter in the thickest part. It must be made of wood, and
may be of any length to suit the striker.

SEC. 3. The bases must be four in number, placed at equal distances
from each other, and securely fastened upon each corner of a square,
whose sides are respectively thirty yards. They must be so constructed
as to be distinctly seen by the umpire, and must cover a space equal to
one square foot of surface. The first, second, and third bases shall
be canvas bags, painted white, and filled with some soft material; the
home base and pitcher’s point to be each marked by a flat circular iron
plate, painted or enameled white.

SEC. 4. The base from which the ball is struck shall be designated the
home base, and must be directly opposite to the second base; the first
base must always be that upon the right-hand, and the third base that
upon the left-hand side of the striker, when occupying his position at
the home base. And in all match games, a line connecting the home and
first base and the home and third base, shall be marked by the use of
chalk, or other suitable material, so as to be distinctly seen by the
umpire.

Many of our clubs have an iron quoit for the home base, that is in
direct violation of the rule which states that the home base must be
marked by “a _flat_ circular iron plate.” Those we allude to rise in
the center, and the consequence is, when a ball touches the base, it
flies off at a tangent, instead of rebounding as if it had touched the
ground, as it would do were it flat, as the rule prescribes.

SEC. 5. The pitcher’s position shall be designated by two lines, four
yards in length, drawn at right angles to a line from home to second
base, having their centers upon that line at two fixed iron plates,
placed at points 15 and 16 1-3 yards distant from the home base. The
pitcher must stand within the lines, and must deliver the ball as near
as possible over the center of the home base, and for the striker.

[It will be seen that the rule requires the ball to be pitched as near
as possible over the home base, _and for the striker_; the pitcher,
therefore, has no right to pitch the ball to the catcher especially, as
is often done when a player is on the first base, and umpires should
see that the rule is enforced.

This important change was made by the Convention of 1863. The object
being to do away with the unfair style of pitching that was in vogue
during 1861, ’62, and ’63, during which period those pitchers who
failed in achieving the success attained by the lamented Creighton,
offset their want of skill by trying to intimidate the batsmen by
pitching the ball _at_ them instead of _for_ them as the rules
require.]

SEC. 6. Should the pitcher repeatedly fail to deliver to the striker
fair balls for the apparent purpose of delaying the game, or for any
cause, the umpire, after warning him, shall call one ball, and if the
pitcher persists in such action, two and three balls; when three balls
shall have been called, the striker shall take the first base; and
should any base be occupied at that time, each player occupying it or
them shall take one base without being put out.

[In warning the pitcher before calling balls on him, all that is
necessary is to call “ball to the bat;” and if two balls are pitched
unfairly after such warning, “one ball” should be called, and if one
unfair ball be delivered after that call, then “two” and “three” balls
should be promptly called. A pitcher “repeatedly” fails if he fails
twice in succession; and he “persists” in his unfair delivery if he
pitch one ball after the first penalty has been imposed. In the first
innings of a game, a little more latitude is allowable, but afterwards
the rule should be strictly enforced to the very letter of the law.]

SEC. 7. The ball must be pitched, not jerked or thrown to the bat; and
whenever the pitcher moves with the apparent purpose or pretension to
deliver the ball, he shall so deliver it, and must have neither foot in
advance of the front line or off the ground at the time of delivering
the ball; and if he fails in either of these particulars, then it shall
be declared a baulk.

[The pitcher makes a baulk when he either jerks a ball to the bat,
has either foot in advance of the line of his position, or off the
ground at the time of delivering the ball, or moves with the apparent
purpose of pitching, without delivering the ball. The sentence “time
of delivering the ball” has been interpreted by the Committee on
Rules and Regulations of the National Association to mean, the period
when the last movement of the arm is made in delivering the ball; and
consequently if either foot of the pitcher be off the ground when this
movement is made—it being nearly simultaneous with the ball’s leaving
the hand of the pitcher—umpires must declare a baulk without being
appealed to.]

SEC. 8. When a baulk is made by the pitcher, every player running the
bases is entitled to one base, without being put out.

[The striker cannot take a base, on a baulk, as he is not considered a
“player running the bases” until he has made the first base and ceased
to be a striker.]

SEC. 9. If a ball, from a stroke of the bat, _first touches the
ground_, _the person of a player_, _or any other object_, behind the
range of home and the first base, or home and the third base, it shall
be termed foul, and must be so declared by the umpire, unasked. If the
ball first touches the ground, either upon, or in front of the range of
those bases, it shall be considered fair.

[Nothing is mentioned in Section 9 in reference to any ball that is
caught, either on the fly or first bound, after touching the side of a
building, a fence, or a tree. In such cases a special rule is requisite
before beginning a match.]

SEC. 10. A player making the home base, shall be entitled to score one
run.

SEC. 11. If three balls are struck at, and missed, and the last one
is not caught, either flying or upon the first bound, it shall be
considered fair, and the striker must attempt to make his run.

SEC. 12. The striker is out if a foul ball is caught, either before
touching the ground, or upon the first bound.

SEC. 13. Or, if three balls are struck at and missed, and the last is
caught, either before touching the ground, or upon the first bound.

[The bound-catch, in this instance—the ball striking the ground back
of the home base—is considered in the light of a foul ball, as far as
the fly-game is concerned, and consequently when the ball is caught on
the bound, on the third strike, the player must be given out, the same
as he was last year under the bound rule.]

SEC. 14. Or, if a fair ball is struck, and the ball is caught without
having touched the ground.

SEC. 15. Or, if a fair ball is struck, and the ball is held by an
adversary on first base, before the striker touches that base.

SEC. 16. Any player running the bases is out, if at any time he is
touched by the ball while in play in the hands of an adversary, without
some part of his person being on the base.

[All that is requisite for a player to “hold his base,” according to
the meaning of the rule, is, for him to touch the base bag, no matter
whether the bag is in its position or not.]

SEC. 17. No ace or base can be made upon a foul ball; such a ball shall
be considered dead, and not in play until it shall first have been
settled in the hands of the pitcher. In such cases players running
bases shall return to them, and may be put out in so returning in the
same manner as the striker when running to the first base.

SEC. 18. No ace nor base can be made when a fair ball has been caught
without having touched the ground; such a ball shall be considered
alive and in play. In such case players running bases shall return to
them, and may be put out in so returning, in the same manner as the
striker when running to first base; but players, when balls are so
caught, may run their bases immediately after the ball has been settled
in the hands of the player catching it.

[It will be seen by the above two Sections that a player running a base
on a foul ball must return to the base he has left _and remain on it_
until the ball has been fairly settled in the hands of the pitcher. But
in case of fly-catches, a player running a base is only required to
return and touch the base, after which he can leave it at once and try
and make the next base. He must, however, touch the base _after_ the
ball has been caught.]

SEC. 19. The striker must stand on a line drawn through the center of
the home base, not exceeding in length three feet from either side
thereof, and parallel with the line occupied by the pitcher. He shall
be considered the striker until he has made the first base. Players
must strike in regular rotation, and, after the first innings is
played, the turn commences with the player who stands on the list next
to the one who lost the third hand.

[This rule should be strictly enforced by the umpire.] A striker has
no right to avail himself of the advantage derived from standing back
of the line of his position, thereby increasing the distance between
himself and the pitcher, and obtaining a better opportunity of judging
the ball. Besides which, a poorly hit ball which would strike the
ground in front of the home base—if the batsman stood on the line of
his base—and lead to his being put out, is changed to a foul ball by
his standing back of his base, and he thereby escapes the penalty of
his poor batting.

SEC. 20. Players must make their bases in the order of striking; and
when a fair ball is struck, and not caught flying, the first base must
be vacated, as also the second and third bases, if they are occupied
at the same time. Players may be put out on any base, under these
circumstances, in the same manner as the striker when running to the
first base.

SEC. 21. Players running bases must touch them; and, so far as
possible, keep upon the direct line between them; and must touch
them in the following order: first, second, third, and home; and if
returning must reverse this order; and should any player run three feet
out of this line, for the purpose of avoiding the ball in the hands of
an adversary, he shall be declared out.

[A player failing to touch his base must be declared out—after an
appeal—unless he can return to the base before he is touched.]

SEC. 22. Any player, who shall intentionally prevent an adversary from
catching or fielding the ball, shall be declared out.

SEC. 23. If the player is prevented from making a base, by the
intentional obstruction of an adversary, he shall be entitled to that
base, and not be put out.

[These two latter sections are, of course, intended solely for any
willful or unnecessary obstruction. It is impossible that a player,
while in the act of fielding a swiftly sent ball, can always be on the
lookout as to where his adversary is running, or that a player running
the bases can always be equally careful in regard to his preventing an
adversary from getting to his base. Some base players have a habit of
pushing players off their bases while in the act of receiving the ball.
Such unfair play should be punished by promptly inflicting the above
penalty.]

SEC. 24. If an adversary stops the ball with his hat or cap, or if a
ball be stopped by any person not engaged in the game, or _if it be
taken from the hands of any one not engaged in the game_, no player can
be put out unless the ball shall first have been settled in the hands
of the pitcher.

SEC. 25. If a ball, from the stroke of a bat, is held under any other
circumstances than as enumerated in Section 22, and without having
touched the ground more than once, the striker is out.

SEC. 26. If two hands are already out, no player running home at the
time the ball is struck, can make a _run to count in the score of the
game_ if the striker is put out.

SEC. 27. An innings must be concluded at the time the third hand is put
out.

SEC. 28. The game should consist of nine innings to each side, when,
should the number of runs be equal, the play shall be continued until a
majority of runs, upon an equal number of innings, shall be declared,
which shall conclude the game.

SEC. 29. In playing all matches, nine players from each club shall
constitute a full field, and they must have been regular members of
the club which they represent, and of no other club, _either in or out
of the National Association_, for thirty days prior to the match. No
change or substitution shall be made after the game has been commenced,
unless for reason of illness or injury. Position of players and choice
of innings shall be determined by captains, previously appointed for
that purpose by the respective clubs.

[This rule of course excludes players belonging to Junior clubs from
taking part in Senior club matches, and likewise excludes players
belonging to any base ball club, but not cricket clubs, as cricket is a
distinct game of ball.]

SEC. 30. The umpire shall take care that the regulations respecting
the ball, bats, bases, and the pitcher’s and striker’s position, are
strictly observed. He shall be the judge of fair and unfair play, and
shall determine all disputes and differences which may occur during the
game; he shall take special care to declare all foul balls and baulks
immediately upon their occurrence, unasked, in a distinct and audible
manner. He shall, in every instance, before leaving the ground, declare
the winning club, and shall record his decision in the books of the
scorers.

SEC. 31. In all matches the umpire shall be selected by the captains
of the respective sides, and shall perform all the duties enumerated
in Section 30, except recording the game, which shall be done by two
scorers, one of whom shall be appointed by each of the contending clubs.

SEC. 32. No person engaged in a match, either as umpire, scorer, or
player, shall be either directly or indirectly interested in any bet
upon the game. Neither umpire, scorer, nor player shall be changed
during a match, unless with the consent of both parties (except for a
violation of this law) except as provided in Section 29, and then the
umpire may dismiss any transgressors.

[This rule was almost entirely ignored last season; for there was
scarcely a game played in which some one or other of the parties
abovenamed did not bet on the result. This year more care will be
taken to observe the rule; for those who bet large sums on the
leading contests of the season, intend to dispute the loss of their
bets in all cases wherein this rule is not observed; and they will
have the right—according to the best sporting authority—to hold
the stake-holder responsible in every instance in which he pays over
the stakes to the winner when this rule has been broken; for under
such circumstances the wager is not fairly won, unless those who bet
mutually agree beforehand to allow of such infringement of the rules of
the game.]

SEC. 33. The umpire in any match shall determine when play shall be
suspended; and if the game cannot be concluded, it shall be decided by
the last even innings, provided five innings have been played, and the
party having the greatest number of runs shall be declared the winner.

SEC. 34. Clubs may adopt such rules respecting balls knocked beyond or
outside of the bounds of the field, as the circumstances of the ground
may demand; and these rules shall govern all matches played upon the
ground, provided, that they are distinctly made known to every player
and umpire, previous to the commencement of the game.

SEC. 35. No person shall be permitted to approach or to speak with the
umpire, scorers, or players, or in any manner to interrupt or interfere
during the progress of the game, unless by special request of the
umpire.

SEC. 36. No person shall be permitted to act as umpire or scorer in
any match, unless he shall be a member of a Base-Ball Club governed by
these rules.

This rule has never been properly observed. Every club should appoint
a regular scorer for the season, and he should be competent to record
the fielding as well as batting score of the game. Until this is done a
full analysis of the season’s play of a club can not be obtained.

SEC. 37. Whenever a match shall have been determined upon between two
clubs, play shall be called at the exact hour appointed; and should
either party fail to produce their players within fifteen minutes
thereafter, the party so failing shall admit a defeat.

[This rule has always been a dead letter. When clubs appoint a time for
calling the game, it should be promptly proceeded with after the time
allowed by the rule has expired.]

SEC. 38. Any match game played by any club in contravention of the
rules adopted by this Association, shall be considered null and void,
and shall not be counted in the list of match games won or lost, except
a game be delayed by rain beyond the time appointed to commence the
same. Any match game can be put off by mutual consent of the parties
about engaging in the game. No match game shall be commenced in the
rain.

[This is a new rule and was designed to obviate the difficulty
attending upon the repudiation of any rule of the game any two clubs
may mutually agree to ignore. Thus, for instance, any two clubs
agreeing to allow a member of either club to play in a match who has
not been a member for thirty days previous to a match, by this rule
cannot claim the ball won, or count the match played as a regular game.
The exception made in case of rain refers to that rule which requires a
game to be commenced within fifteen minutes of the time appointed.]

SEC. 39. No person who shall be in arrears to any other club, or who
shall at any time receive compensation for his services as player,
shall be competent to play in any match.

SEC. 40. Should a striker stand at the bat without striking at good
balls repeatedly pitched to him, for the apparent purpose of delaying
the game, or of giving advantage to a player, the umpire, after warning
him, shall call one strike, and if he persists in such action, two and
three strikes. When three strikes are called he shall be subject to the
same rules as if he had struck at three fair balls.

[Section 40 is a rule that should be strictly enforced, as it refers
to a part of the game that is oft-times a very tedious and annoying
feature. How often do we see the striker, the moment his predecessor
has made his first base, stand still at the home base and await the
moment when the player on the first base can avail himself of the
failure of either the pitcher or catcher to hold the ball while tossing
it backward and forward to each other. Some catchers—chiefly among
boys, however—actually stand to the right of the home base purposely
for this style of game; and even when the pitcher and catcher are
inclined to do their duty, the batsman is not, and the latter is
frequently allowed to stop the progress of the game by his refusal to
strike at good balls, under the plea that they do not suit him, when
it is apparent to all that he simply wants to allow his partner to
get to his second base. In every respect it is preferable to play the
game manfully, and without resorting to any such trickery as this,
which not only tires the spectator, but detracts from the merit of the
game itself. Even under the new rule of pitching this unfair play was
practiced last season. It is to be hoped that umpires will do their
duty this year, and put an entire stop to it, which they have the power
to do.]

SEC. 41. Every match hereafter made shall be decided by the best two
games out of three, unless a single game shall be mutually agreed upon
by the contesting clubs.


ON THE SELECTION AND MEASURING OF A GROUND.

IT is of the greatest importance that a Base Ball ground should be
perfectly level and as free as possible from all obstructions in the
shape of irregularities, stones, &c., and a fine, short turf will be
found to add materially to the comfort of the players. The length of
the field should be 600 feet, while the breadth about 400. The home
base or batter’s stand, should be 70 feet from the head of the field.
The space between the home base and the catcher’s stand, must be firmly
packed earth as hard and level as a billiard table. The bases should
be square blocks of wood covered with a double thickness of canvas and
they are sometimes stuffed with hair to prevent accidents from falling,
and here let us suggest that one point be not overlooked in preparing
the ground, that is the erection of seats protected by an awning, for
the accommodation of the “fair sex,” who manifest great interest in
this game, and whose presence never fails to inspire the players with
renewed ardor.

The bases should be firmly secured by leathern straps passing
completely around them. The simplest method of laying out your ground
is to first determine the point of your home base. Then measure down
the field 127 feet 4 inches, which will give the position of your
second base. Then taking a cord 180 feet in length and fastening either
end to the second and home bases, by grasping the center and extending
it to the right and left you have the points of your first and third
bases. You have now found a square whose sides are 90 feet. Then draw
a line from the home to second base, and at a point 45 feet from the
former will be the pitcher’s first point, and three feet further on the
same line his second point.

Posts painted white, and elevated from the ground so as to be
distinctly seen by the umpire, are placed on a line with the home and
first base, and home and third base, at least 100 feet from the bases.
These are termed “foul ball posts,” and are used by the umpire in his
decisions in reference to foul balls.

[Illustration: DIAGRAM OF BASE BALL FIELD.]


PITCHER’S POINT AND HOME BASE.

BOTH the pitcher’s point and the home base are indicated by iron quoits
not less than nine inches in diameter and painted white, secured by
means of iron spikes from beneath. A plank six feet in length, two
inches in width, and inserted in the earth six or eight inches deep,
with enough edge above ground so that it may be distinctly seen by the
umpire, marks the line of the pitcher’s position.


ON THE USE OF THE BAT.

ALL bats and balls used are made regulation size, and the bats of
different woods as may suit the striker. For a light bat the English
willow is prized by many, as its tough, close fibre recommends it to
the heavy batter, as well as the ease with which it can be wielded.
With those who prefer a heavier bat the ash and hickory are favorites.
A light bat is generally preferred to a heavier one as it meets a
swiftly pitched ball with greater promptness. There are nearly as many
different modes of handling the bat as there are players. We see some
grasping it with the left hand on the handle, and sliding the right
swiftly down the bat. Others take the bat near the middle, others swing
it with a long sweeping stroke, while still another class hold it as in
Cricket, pointing to the ground.

It is not so necessary to strike a powerful blow as to hit with
quickness, and at the same time maintain a firm and natural position.
It is not the heaviest, who make the most powerful batters. Stand with
the foot on the line of the striker’s position, and be prepared to
strike as soon as the ball leaves the pitcher’s hand.


DESCRIPTION OF THE GAME.

IN order to play the game of Base Ball, nine players of a side are
necessary, one side taking the bat and the other the field. Their
relative positions are generally determined by tossing a coin. A full
game consists of nine innings to each side, an inning lasting until
three players are “put out,” either at the bat or while running the
bases, as will be seen by referring to the rules. The side scoring the
largest number of runs during the game is declared victorious. The list
of fielders comprise catcher, pitcher, first, second and third basemen,
short stop, right, center and left fieldsmen. When each one is in his
appointed place, the captain of the fielding nine calls out “ready,”
to which the umpire promptly responds “play!”—and upon the first ball
which leaves the pitcher’s hand the game commences.

The batsman or striker stands at the home base on a line drawn through
its center, parallel to one extending from first to third base
and extending three feet on each side of it. The batsman requires
considerable judgment to assist him in effectually striking at balls.
He must have a quick eye and ready hand to meet the deceptive pitching
of an experienced player. If these qualities are wanting he may find
himself suddenly caught out on a “foul tip,” or forced ingloriously
to retire on a “three strike.” As soon as the ball is struck, it is
the duty of a batsman to run at once for the first base, and should he
arrive there before the ball reaches the baseman he is said to have
“made his base.” Many players acquire the habit of pausing to watch the
course of a ball which may possibly fall within the “foul lines,” or if
an “air ball” be struck, waiting to see if it is caught by a fielder,
before he starts for his base. This is wrong, as if it prove a “foul,”
the umpire will announce it in time for the player to return, and
should the “fly ball” be missed or “muffed,” the player is well on his
way to the base. Upon reaching his base, the striker is succeeded by
the next batsman on the list, and when three of these are “put out,”
the fielders take their turn at the bat. A run is scored by a player
touching in succession the four bases, avoiding being himself touched
by the ball while running. A home run is made by his hitting the ball
to such a distance that he makes the four bases before it is returned.
In case of a tie at the close of the ninth inning the game may be
prolonged until one or the other of the contestants obtain the most
runs on even innings.

Should anything occur to put a stop to the game, before five innings
have been played by each side the game is declared drawn. For all other
necessary particulars in regard to the game, the reader is referred to
the preceding rules and regulations.


FIELD POSITIONS.


1. The Catcher.

THE duty of this player is to catch or stop all balls pitched or
thrown to the home base. To fill this position properly, requires no
small measure of dexterity and skill, always on the alert to secure
foul bounds and tips, with a vigilant eye to the bases, together with
precision and power in throwing to them, the catcher’s position is so
important that he is generally chosen captain of the nine.

After a striker has made his first base, the catcher should advance
toward the pitcher and stand directly behind the bat so as to take the
balls before they bound and by throwing swiftly at the second base cut
off a player from making that base. When a ball is batted high to long
field and several fielders run to catch it, he should distinctly call
the fielder by name whom he thinks surest to take it, when the others
should pause, and strive only to take it on the bound, should it be
missed on the fly.


2. The Pitcher.

THE position of the player is behind a line four yards in length,
drawn at right angles from the home to second base, at a distance of
45 feet from the former base. Four feet in the rear of this line, in
another parallel to it and in the space between these two must the
pitcher stand, immediately before, and while delivering the ball.
Both feet must be firmly planted on the ground while he is pitching,
and he should be careful not to jerk or throw the ball, but deliver
it directly over the home base and for the striker. The pitcher is
frequently called upon to supply the places of basemen while they are
fielding, and it is of great importance that he should be a ready
catcher and good fielder. A ball pitched at a high rate of speed, and
at the same time containing a bias or “twist” will prove the most
effective. As this position calls for a great amount of physical labor,
some person who is not easily fatigued should be selected to fill it.


3. The Short Stop.

The duties of this player are many and arduous, and his position
the most dangerous one on the field. He stands in the center of the
triangle formed by the second and third bases and pitcher’s position,
though he should vary his position according to his knowledge of
different player’s style of batting. It is to this spot that nearly
all the swiftly batted ground balls come, which require more nerve and
practice to stop than any other. Upon securing the ball the short
stop should pass it swiftly to whatever base a player may be running
for, generally to the first. He should be on the alert to cover the
third base when the catcher throws to it; to back up the second when
receiving a ball from the fielders, and also to take balls on the bound
when missed by the third baseman or pitcher.


4. First Base.

This player should be a splendid catch, and able to hold swiftly sent
balls, as he will be obliged to take them from the pitcher and short
stop, more frequently than any of the other basemen. He should play a
little below his base, and inside the line of the foul ball post in
order to secure balls which would otherwise pass him. As soon as the
ball is struck he should return to his base and with one foot upon it
stand ready to receive the ball from whatever player may have fielded
it.

This is the only base where a player can be put out without being
touched by the ball, (excepting balls caught on the fly, or those that
are fouled) as it is only necessary that the baseman with ball in hand
touch the base before the striker reaches it. He should instantly
deliver the ball to the pitcher or to any base where it may be
necessary.


5. Second Base.

Many ball players consider this position to be the most important point
in the whole game, and with good reason. It should never be filled but
by an accurate thrower, a sure catcher and a thorough fielder. As most
of the balls pass to the left of this base it is well to play in that
direction and a little back of it, although when a player reaches the
first base the baseman should instantly return. The second base can
give material aid to the pitcher by backing him up closely, and not
suffering a ball to pass them both if possible to stop it. If he fails
to catch a ball, let him by all means stop it in some way, in order to
put out a player by touching him, then return it to the pitcher.


6. Third Base.

The position of third baseman is quite as important as any of the
others, as in this direction pass the majority of foul balls, which
with dexterity may be taken on the fly. As he has considerable fielding
to perform it is best that he play away from his base, except when a
player runs either to or from it. He should never attempt to hinder
a player from reaching his base, and this advice should be taken and
acted upon by all basemen.


7. Left Field.

Here is a chance for the display of the finest of fielding, as half of
the air balls are sent in this direction. The left fielder is required
to be a swift runner, powerful thrower, and an excellent catcher in
order to acceptably fill this position.


8. Center Field.

This player should be in readiness to back up the second base, and
should never go to long field except when a heavy hitter is at the bat.
He is required to possess nearly the same qualities which distinguish
the left fielder.


9. Right Field.

It is difficult to find a poor place in any of the nine positions in
a well contested game of Base Ball, but if there is one which is at
all inferior to the rest, the right field should be so considered,
simply because balls are sent in this direction but occasionally. Yet
it is important that this field be occupied by one who understands his
business, as the batsman if he sees signs of weakness there, will soon
take advantage of his discovery by batting frequently into that quarter.


The Umpire.

One of the most undesirable positions on a Base Ball field is that of
the umpire. He cannot fail to displease some one by his decisions,
though he govern himself by the strictest rules of the game. Great
firmness here is necessary in supporting a decision, and on any
doubtful point it is better that he adhere to his first impressions
as they are most likely to prove correct. No one should be allowed to
approach, or converse with the umpire during a game. He should close
both eyes and ears to everything outside of the game in progression,
and allow no remarks of whatever nature in reference to his judgment
to influence him in the least. All foul balls should be called in a
loud, clear and distinct tone of voice, and no member of a club should
question any decision, however incorrect it may appear to them, but
cheerfully acquiesce, and if corrections are to be made, there will be
plenty of time at the conclusion of the game. It is unnecessary to add
that the person acting as umpire should possess a thorough knowledge
of the game in all its details. He must keep a strict watch upon both
pitcher and striker, and if necessary call strikes or balls upon them
in accordance with the rules. His position is to the right of and
between the striker and catcher, on a line between the home and third
base.


The Scorer.

The scorer may be regarded as the clerk of the game, and it is his
duty to record the score of each player, and make a full and complete
showing of each man’s standing throughout the game. The same person
should always be appointed scorer in all match games, and he should be
selected as well for his gentlemanly qualities as for his familiarity
with the game.

[Illustration]




Archery.


ARCHERY was formerly one of the chief pastimes of England, and at
different periods in modern days it has been a fashionable amusement;
and in this country it has been practiced in some few localities.
Archery is a healthful and agreeable pastime, and ought to be revived
and in general use all over this country; it is scarcely excelled by
any recreation in which propriety permits young ladies to indulge.

The attitude of an _accomplished_ female archer (for archery is not to
be acquired without much practice) at the moment of bending the bow
is particularly graceful; all the actions and positions tend at once
to produce a proper degree of strength in the limbs and to impart a
general elegance of bearing.

Ladies usually shoot at a distance of about fifty yards. Two targets
are placed opposite each other, and the archers shoot from one to the
other; that is, when all the party have shot at one target, they walk
up to it, gather their arrows, and shoot back to the one they came
from, to which they again return when their arrows are expended; and so
on, shooting from one to the other in rotation. In that way not merely
the arm, but the whole frame, enjoys the benefit of salutary exercise
in the open air, while the mind is interested and the spirits elevated
by the sport.

The attitude in shooting is a matter of much importance; the feet
should be a few inches apart, the neck slightly curved, so as to bring
the head a little downward; the face, but no part of the front of the
body, is to be turned towards the mark. The left arm must be held out
quite straight to the wrist, which should be bent inwards; the bow
is to be held easy in the hand; and the arrow, when drawn, should be
brought, not towards the eye, but the ear. The right hand should begin
to draw the string as the left raises the bow; when the arrow is three
parts drawn, the aim is to be taken. In doing this the head of the
arrow should appear to the right of the mark; the arrow is then drawn
to its head, and immediately loosened.

To draw the arrow from the mark or ground it should be taken by the
hand, as near the head of the arrow as possible, and extracted in the
same direction as it entered. If these instructions be not attended
to, the young archer will break many arrows in drawing them from the
ground, or the mark, when she is so successful as to hit it.

In selecting a bow the chief point to be attended to is the adaptation
of the bow to the strength of the person who is to use it. Bows,
arrows, and accoutrements can easily be obtained in any city. Any boy
can find good material for bows in almost any piece of woods, and
easily make a bow for himself or his lady friends.

Targets are made of wood and generally painted in circles. The central
point is the one to be aimed at by the archers.

The same dresses used at Croquet parties are desirable for Archery, and
add much to the graceful appearance of the Archer.

Let us become skillful Archers and have Archery meetings as of old, and
let ladies and gentlemen, or boys and girls, contend for the prizes.

It is useless here to give an elaborate essay on the history of
Archery; any person sufficiently enthusiastic to desire it, can easily
obtain English books containing detailed directions on Archery, and its
history from ancient to modern times.

[Illustration]




Gardening, Flowers.


WE, as a nation, are not a happy, home-loving people. The “spirit of
unrest” pervades all classes.

This enterprising, uneasy spirit, has been, and is, of benefit to us as
a comparatively new country, in settling and breaking our wild Western
lands.

But the time has come, when it is well to curb that spirit, and
cultivate all quiet, home-loving influences.

Therefore, I beseech you, parents, to begin in earliest infancy, to
cultivate a love of the beautiful in nature, give your little ones
flowers; and as soon as they are able to play in the garden, give them
a little spot of their own to dig in; and when they can understand the
process, give them seeds to plant, and some few flowers to cultivate.
I can tell you of a happy cottage home, where the children, from
earliest infancy, have lived among flowers. Each had their tiny garden,
with spade, hoe, trowel and watering-pot. The father and mother would
also assist with their own hands in training vines, roses and shrubs,
in artistic beauty. The good father never went to his counting-room
without some flowers in his hand, or in the button-hole of his coat,
the valued gift from the tiny garden of one of his darlings. Years
passed and fortune favored them, but they never would exchange their
cottage home, with its vines, trees and shrubs, for all the stately
mansions in the town. And as the daughters married, and the sons left
to seek their fortunes, they would look back with intense longing
to their loved home; and joyous were their meetings around the home
Christmas tree.

On Sundays they always, even in midwinter, ornamented their social
table with flowers, for they are God’s smiles. Therefore, my friends,
I speak from observation, and from seeing the effect of an opposite
course. If you wish to lessen your doctor’s bill, and give the beauty
of robust health and happiness to your children, girls or boys, give
them a garden and let them plant, weed and water it. If your children
bring you even a simple field daisy, express your pleasure to them, and
let them not see you cast it aside.

Teach your boys the use of a pruning-knife, and how to graft; then give
them some trees to experiment upon. You may save them from dissipation,
by giving them a taste for Horticulture. It is a happy, health-giving
employment.

Decorate even your barn with graceful vines. The poorest house can be
made an agreeable place, by transplanting a few of the many simple,
wild vines. It is not natural to love intensely a stiff, ungainly
object.

I have often thought, as I have roamed about the farming districts of
New England, and have seen the many great, stiff, square houses, with
not a graceful tree, or flower to relieve their nakedness, (though now
and then a syringa, or lilac bush, or cinnamon rose, and perhaps a
stately old butternut, may be seen,) the sons and daughters of those
households will surely emigrate. Utility is our hobby. Some farmers
think it waste time to plant a flower, as it yields no fruit.

Remember the old saying, “all work and no play makes Jack a dull boy.”
You that dwell in a city, strive to have a small spot in the country to
which you may send your children in Summer, to roam at will. I heard a
little child, in urging her mother to go into the country in vain, cry
out, “It is too, _too bad_, mamma, I know God did not make the city for
little children, because he loves us.”

Do not waste your money at fashionable watering-places. Even in early
years, take your children to the woods and let them see nature in its
wild state. There is nothing like a day in the woods for refreshing us
all, in body and mind. The wild music of running brooks is so lulling,
the birds carol their “native wood-notes wild” so sweetly, the strange
blended odor of the damp mould, the leaves, the wild flowers, and the
prospect of the distant meadow, are so delightful; the play of the
sunlight through the dense foliage, and on the sylvan walks, is so
beautiful, and the quiet is so marked, after the hum and roar of a
city, that the mind is tranquilized, and both you and your children
will be nearer to God, and nearer to one another, for every hour so
spent. Our whole country is full of wild beauty. Spend your spare money
in decorating your homes with trees, flowers and shrubs. The influence
upon your children will be far more beneficial.

If your children wish for money to purchase seeds and flowers for their
gardens, if possible, give it cheerfully. It is far better so spent
than in dress and toys. Let them plan their own gardens and experiment
as much as they please. A very pretty fence can be made round such
gardens, by a number of stakes of equal lengths pointed at one end to
drive into the ground, square at the top, and painted green. Then place
them at equal distances around your garden, and bore holes about six or
seven inches apart for the twine, which should be brown linen. Pass the
twine through the holes, in lines all around the garden. Plant vines
which run rapidly, such as Cypress Vine, Madeira Vine, Nasturtium,
Maurandya Barclayanna, Dwarf Convolvulus, Mountain Fringe, &c., &c. By
midsummer your simple fence will be very beautiful.

Having spent many years in cultivating flowers, perhaps a few practical
directions from my own experience may be of service to my readers.


HOW TO PLANT SEEDS.

WE often think because the seed we plant does not germinate that we
have purchased poor seed, when the fault is in the manner of planting.

Nearly all kinds of flower seeds require transplanting, therefore it
is best to plant in boxes, pots, or hot-beds. Old cigar boxes are
convenient and are easily handled, but first bore holes in the bottom
of the boxes, and in your pots or boxes place either broken clam
or oyster shells or pieces of old flower pots as a drainage; then
take light, rich earth and sift it or rub it carefully in your hands
to be sure there are no lumps; some bake the earth to destroy any
insects which may be in it, but it answers the same purpose to pour
boiling water on it. After you have filled your boxes or pots with
this prepared earth, sprinkle your seed carefully over it, and sift
over them light soil sufficient to cover them, moisten them with warm
water, and place the box where there is but little light and throw a
piece of paper over the top. A warm place will start them best. Let
them remain thus several days, till the seeds have a chance to swell,
before you give them much light, and keep the earth moist; (a sponge
is excellent to water them, as it does not disturb the position of the
seeds; also use warm water,) as soon as you see they are sprouting
give them light, and air, if not too cold, or else the plant will not
have strength to grow well. Hot-beds are the best, and can be made
with but little expense, by taking some old box, and if you do not
possess an old window sash you can purchase one of some builder for
a trifling sum of money, and fit it to your box by nailing strips at
the sides; dig a place the size of the box and two or three feet deep,
fill it with horse manure mixed with straw, which is the most heating,
then sprinkle soil over the top about six inches deep, place your box
on the top, carefully heaping the earth around the outside, and your
hot-bed is made, in which you can start your seeds and slips by either
placing your boxes or pots in the earth on top of the manure and plant
your seeds and slips in them, or as many prefer, planting in the soil
of your hot-bed. After your seedling plants are of sufficient size
to transplant, if you first transplant them into small pots, you can
easily plant them in your flower beds without disturbing the roots, and
the plants will not require covering; you must first dig a hole and
pour water into it, then carefully slip the plant, dirt and all, from
the pots and place into the hole made for it and press the earth tight
around it. Of course they must remain in the pot till they are well
rooted. In raising slips you need to mix in full half common scouring
sand with the soil, and they must be shaded from the light several days.

All who care for flowers will desire to raise Verbenas, as they blossom
all Summer. If you wish to raise them from seed they should be sown
in February or first of March. One secret in raising fine Verbenas
is change of soil. It would be better to plant them every year in a
different location, but if you renew the soil it will do to plant them
twice in the same bed, but never three years in succession. Indeed,
flowers as well as vegetables need constant change of soil; they soon
exhaust the earth. Seeds are better that are raised in locations
distant from the place where they are to be sown. Flowers soon
deteriorate if you continue to plant over and over from seed raised
in the same spot; that is one of the reasons why seeds from Europe are
generally preferred by florists. Japan Pink seed should be planted in
March, in order to have them flower the first year; they are hardy and
blossom also the second year. Pansy seed should be planted as early as
Verbenas. Ten Weeks’ Stock, Phlox Drummondi, Double Zinnias, Lobelia,
Petunias, Portulaca, Salpiglossis, Candytuft, Larkspur, &c., should be
planted in April. If you desire to raise Picotee or Carnation Pinks
for the next year, and Canterbury Bells and Fox Gloves, sow in April.
Sow Asters of all kinds the last of April or first of May. Some of the
climbers, such as Maurandya, Barclayanna, Tropæolum, commonly called
Nasturtium, Cypress Vine, Thunbergia, &c., need transplanting, and
better be sown early. Sweet Peas should be sown in the open soil about
three inches deep, early in April. It is better to soak the seed in
warm water before sowing. When they have germinated and as they begin
to climb, fill in earth around them, and water now and then thoroughly
with soap suds. Mignonette should not be transplanted; sow the seed in
the open soil the first of May. Candytuft and Sweet Alyssum, are hardy,
and the seed can be sown out of doors; but if you have once had them,
they will come up self sown; look over your beds in Spring and take up
such plants, when you have the soil prepared and beds made, then you
can plant them back again where you desire. Joseph’s Coat is a very
brilliant plant, its leaves are all shades of green, red and yellow;
the seed can be sown either in or out of doors by the first of May,
also Golden Calliopsis. Balsams will grow better if the seeds are not
planted till the second week in May out of doors.

All the flowers I have mentioned are desirable even in a small garden;
of course there are hundreds of varieties of even annuals, but unless
you have a gardener it is impossible to raise them all, for it is
desirable even in a small garden to have some flowers raised by slips,
or bought from some greenhouse, such as Fuchsias, Double Feverfews,
Scarlet Geraniums, Heliotropes, Rose Geraniums, Lemon Verbenas, Monthly
Roses and Hardy Perpetuals, &c. Hardy Perpetual Roses are desirable in
every garden, they grow so thrifty and blossom all summer, and with
a little covering will live out all Winter; and if they are showered
often early in the Spring while the dew is on the roses, with whale
oil soap suds, using a syringe to shower them, it will prevent the
usual damage done by the slug. If you have a shady, moist place in your
garden there you can plant your Lily of the Valley, double blue English
Violet, Forget-me-not, and Pansy.

Fuchsias also require some shade. Heliotropes and Geraniums will bear
enriching more than most plants; often watering with guano water is
excellent. A table-spoonful of guano to a common water-pail full of
water is sufficiently strong. It also improves Pansies, Fuchsias and
nearly all plants except Roses. Soap suds is better for Roses and
Verbenas, at least according to my experience. Nearly all plants
make a finer show in a garden arranged either in beds, each variety
by itself, or in clusters. Before planting your garden in Spring it
is well to carefully consider the nature of each flower, and arrange
your garden so that each flower can be displayed to advantage; never
plant promiscuously; it is astonishing what a difference landscape
gardening will make in the general aspect of even a small place. It is
quite as desirable as to arrange the colors in a picture to harmonize.
Even an old stump of a tree can be made beautiful by planting vines
around it, or by scooping out the top and filling in soil, and planting
Nierembergia, Lobelia, Double Nasturtium, Variegated Myrtle, &c., in
it. Those I have mentioned blossom all Summer, except the Myrtle, the
leaves of which are as beautiful as many flowers.

If we ladies would spend less time on our dress and in arrangements
for the table, and take that time for working in our gardens with our
children, we should not only make our homes more attractive but we
should gain in health and strength. Early every Spring call a family
council to decide the arrangement of your flower garden. Let your
boys have a place to raise vegetables as a pastime. Encourage them
to diligence by promising to purchase all they will raise; in that
way they can earn money to give to the poor, or for their Christmas
presents; even children will take far more pleasure in giving what they
have really earned with their own hands.


FERNERIES.

IS it not, my friends, very pleasant to have a bit of the Summer woods
in our parlors in midwinter? Such a pleasure is within the reach of us
all, with but little trouble and expense. Those who live in cities and
cannot go into the country, surely must have some friend who can supply
them, or the materials can be obtained at any public greenhouse. First
you require a glass dome, or what is still better, take five panes of
glass any size you please, four to form the sides, one for the top,
fasten the glass together with a light wooden frame, then take any tin
dish, like a baking pan, or if round a tin plate or jelly cake pan, or
a tin dish can be made to fit it for a trifling sum of money; paint the
tin green on the outside. Then collect some pieces of broken flower
pots, or still better, bits of marble, granite or any stone and scatter
them around the tin dish, placing in the center some moss-grown stump
or stick, and pile the stones around it; then collect from the woods,
ferns, mosses, partridge-vines with its bright red berries, (indeed,
any plant will grow in these ferneries which can be found in moist
places in the woods;) take up a little of the leaf mould in which
they grow, they need but little soil, arrange your plants spreading
the roots carefully over the stones, scattering a little leaf mould
on them, and placing your mosses around the whole. The tallest plants
should form the center, but in arranging even ferneries, it is more
agreeable to exercise your own taste. Before placing your globe or
glass frame over your fernery, sprinkle the plants thoroughly, then
cover with the glass, and let it remain a few days in the shade. You
can keep them where you please, but I think they grow better near a
window; be very careful not to water them too often, once a month is
generally sufficient; if too wet they will mould and die; when there
is but little moisture on the glass, it is well to raise the glass to
ascertain if it is dry. My fernery has been made four years, it has
required but little care; now and then I add a new fern, some moss, or
any suitable plant gathered from the woods, and remove any dried ferns
or leaves. It often renews itself. Trailing arbutus and partridge-vines
will blossom in ferneries. It is always pleasant to the eye and no care
after the first expense and trouble. Ivy and Lycopodium grow well in
ferneries, but the rare ferns, &c., from green-houses do not flourish
as well as those plants taken from our native woods.


IVIES.

ENGLISH IVIES are a great ornament to our rooms, and are hardy and
require very little care. After the first two years they grow quite
rapidly, therefore it is well to procure two year old plants, train
them on your curtains, over your windows and pictures. Many make a
mistake by changing the pots very often, thinking they require a very
large pot, which is not so, for they do not require as much earth as
many plants, only keep them moist, and have rich loam for the soil; it
is well to water them every month with guano water, prepared according
to the same rule given for flowers. The poet’s ivy is very pretty, the
leaf being quite small. The most beautiful ivy I ever saw was one that
never was removed from its place Summer or Winter; it filled a large
bay window, encircled the whole room and wound around many pictures;
now and then a gardener came and changed the soil, and the leaves were
occasionally washed. Hanging baskets of moss with flowers growing in
it, are exceedingly pretty in Winter.


PRESSED FLOWERS.

TO press flowers, to be arranged on paper like a painting, you must
take some plain white wrapping paper, (in Paris you can obtain paper
prepared by a chemical process to preserve the colors) and place your
flowers or leaves carefully between two sheets of the paper. Then
press them by placing a heavy weight over them, (letter presses are
excellent) and leave them a day or two, then change the paper; thus
the juices of the flowers are absorbed. It takes a week or two to
press perfectly, and in Summer often longer. When dry, place them in a
book or some air-tight box ready for use. A year is required to make a
varied and handsome collection, as each flower has its own season for
blossoming. Wild flowers retain their colors better than cultivated;
but experience alone will teach you what flowers will retain their
color best. Many pretend to be able to preserve all kinds of flowers,
but it is impossible. I will give a list of flowers which are known to
retain their color by this mode of pressing.

All Geraniums (except the horse-shoe and sweet-scented), preserve their
color. They are very essential, as their colors are brilliant and keep
for years. All yellow flowers both wild and cultivated retain their
color. The Violet and Pansy, Dwarf Blue Convolvulus, Blue Larkspur,
Blue Myrtle, Blue Lobelia, Heaths, the small original Red Fuchsia, Wild
Housatonia, and many tiny blue, and even white flowers press perfectly.

For green, Ivy, Maiden Hair, Ferns or Brake, Mosses, &c., retain their
color best. Rarely a cultivated green leaf presses well. Autumn leaves,
if small, and the youngest oak leaves mix in well. Certain kinds of
stems such as Pansy, and others of similar character, are best adapted
for pressing.

After your collection is made, take some card-board, without a polish
if possible, and arrange your flowers as you design to have them. Gum
them to the paper with tragacanth, using a camel’s hair brush, then
press on the paper and flower with a cloth, carefully absorbing all
moisture, as well as firmly pressing the flower on the paper. Geraniums
and some large flowers look better if each leaf is glued on separately.

In forming your bouquet, it is better to arrange the stems first and
work upwards. Baskets and vases of moss with flowers are pretty. To
form these, you must trace out with a pencil your vase or basket, and
glue on the moss. Then arrange your flowers.

I have heard amusing criticisms on the coloring of such bouquets, from
persons who mistook them for paintings. Framed and covered with a
glass, they make ornamental pictures.

It is a pleasant way of preserving mementos of friends, places or
events. Flower albums or journals are very beautiful. Wreaths arranged
of different varieties of Pelargoniums mixed in with any pretty green,
and other little flowers, such as Lobelias, are very handsome and
the colors are durable. Pansies of different shades look well, and
brilliant wreaths may be made of all the varieties of flowers that hold
their color. The oval shape looks the best for wreaths.

There are innumerable varieties of Ferns, Lycopodiums and Maiden
Hair, both native and foreign, suitable for pressing. By pasting
each specimen on a separate sheet and interspersing specimens of our
beautiful Autumn leaves also on separate sheets, and fastening them
together, either bound as a book or in a portfolio, you will possess a
beautiful and attractive book with but little expense.

Crosses can be arranged with ferns and shaded to appear as if painted
in perspective, and look like a cross standing on a mossy bank, with
flowers, &c., growing around and over it. First draw and shade your
cross as a guide, then take the small leaflets of the darkest colored
ferns you can procure, and glue them on carefully where the cross
should be in shadow darkest, then take the brighter green ferns (such
as are gathered in Spring,) and end with the white ferns (which can
only be obtained in the Fall), using them for the lightest shade; be
careful to cover every part and shade it with nature’s colors as you
would with paint; in a cross six inches high and suitably proportioned,
full two hundred of the tiny leaflets of the fern may be used to good
advantage before it is completed. Then take wild Lycopodium if you can
obtain it, if not, the finest of the cultivated, and arrange it on your
cross to look like a vine growing over and hanging from it; also paste
on to it tiny little pressed Lobelias, and arrange small ferns, mosses
and any little flowers (wild ones are preferable), around the base of
the cross to look like a mossy bank. Different designs can be arranged
in the same way.

Be very careful in pasting on flowers and leaves that every part,
however small, is firmly fixed to the paper; press them on after
pasting with a dry cloth.


STRAWBERRIES.

A FEW hints as regards the cultivation of Strawberries may be useful
to both boys and girls; for fine berries can be raised even on a small
plot of ground, if the soil be rich. Plants for a new bed should be
set out early in the Spring; the roots will then grow strong and the
plants will be better able to bear the cold of Winter. Some gardeners
prefer to plant their strawberry roots in August, or even late in the
Autumn, and if the Winter is mild, or deep snows cover the ground, the
vines will live and bear fruit the next Summer. Some prefer to raise
strawberries in hills, but the most prolific vines are those planted
in beds about three feet wide with a path between, filled with straw,
to keep the fruit from the ground; it is well to cut off most of the
runners. Of course the beds should be kept free from weeds. There are
many new varieties, but the old Hovey’s Seedling is as reliable as any
and very prolific. The Russell is easily propagated; vines planted
in April will often yield fine strawberries in June. The Wilson is a
profitable strawberry for the market because of its large yield, but
it is hardly equal in flavor to the Hovey. The Hovey will soon run out
if planted by itself; it requires some other kind to be planted with
it. The Pine is usually the variety selected for that purpose. It is
useless to enumerate the several varieties, for nearly every locality
has its favorite strawberry. Some kinds will scarcely bear a perfect
berry in some locations, while in a different locality the same berry
will be loaded with perfect fruit. Sometimes a healthy and vigorous
looking bed of strawberry-plants will produce but few berries—then you
must examine the blossoms, those which bear fruit will have the berry
formed in the flower—while others will blossom freely but do not bear
fruit; these are the male plants and it is better to leave but few of
them in your strawberry beds. When you plant the new roots dig a hole
with a trowel and fill it with water, then spread out the roots and
pack the earth close around them, but when they are fully rooted and
commence to grow, the earth should be kept loose around them.

Strawberry plants should be replanted every third year; it is best to
change the location of the bed if possible, or at least to renew the
soil. Boys or girls who raise and gather from their own little garden a
dish of strawberries will find great pleasure in presenting it to their
friends as fruits of their own labor.


GRAPES.

THE care of the grape-vine is a pleasant occupation. To gather the
rich, ripe bunches of its delicious fruit is a grand enjoyment. Almost
every one can command a spot of ground sufficient for the liberal
support of a grape-vine. It may be planted in any unappropriated
corner about the house—a sunny spot is to be preferred, but a vine
may do well with but little direct sunshine, if it is well sheltered
and properly cared for. It may be planted at the foot of a tree, the
branches of which are not near the ground, and it will find its way
high up the tree and will yield large crops of fine fruit hidden
among its own thick foliage and that of the tree, provided the ground
immediately about its roots can be reached and kept warm by the sun’s
rays.

As it grows it will endeavor to adapt itself to the circumstances that
surround it, and will take the direction your taste or convenience
require it to follow. Its flexible branches are obedient to the gentle
hand of the careful cultivator. You may train it upon stakes six or
eight feet high, or upon a low trellis where the fruit will be within
easy reach of your hand. You may have the fruit within a few inches of
the ground, or by removing all the lower branches of the vine, you can
cause the ripe bunches to hang in graceful festoons around and over the
window of your chamber, high above the reach of accident and pilferers.
The grape-vine will do as it is bid, which is much more than can be
said of some young people, whose eyes sparkle at the sight of its fruit.

In preparing the ground in which to plant the vine, reference must be
had to the character of the soil. If the soil is clayey and cold, or if
the neighboring surface is such as to turn an undue proportion of the
rains upon the place where you propose to plant your vine, care must
be taken to secure for the roots of the vine a sufficient drainage. If
the roots of the vine are surrounded by wet and cold earth, the fruit
will mature slowly and will be endangered by the early frosts. You will
secure a sufficient drainage by digging a hole three feet deep and five
or six feet in diameter and throwing into it small stones, fragments of
bricks or other like rubbish, to the depth of about eighteen inches,
and filling to the surface with the soil. If the soil in which you
propose to plant your vine is light, no artificial drainage will be
necessary.

Dig over the ground and mix with it some well rotted manure or bone
dust to the depth of your spade. The plan of trenching and deep
manuring is of questionable advantage. The roots of the vine prefer to
run near the surface, but they will seek the rich soil wherever it may
be; and if they are drawn away from the surface of the ground and out
of their natural direction to the colder soil below, the effect upon
the fruit may be unfavorable, both as to quality and quantity.

In the ground thus prepared set your young vine from the nursery.
First, drive down a stake to which you can tie the young vine, then
place the roots of the vine three inches below the surface of the
ground, carefully spreading the roots so that they will be as nearly as
possible in the position in which they grew in the nursery.

The beautiful operations of nature will then commence. The roots of
the vine will at once begin to adapt themselves to their new home,
and their delicate fibres will firmly clasp the particles of the
well-prepared soil; the warm days of the early Spring will draw the
sap up through the whole length of the vine, the buds will open and
exhibit their delicate tints, new shoots and broad green leaves will
follow, and you can soon eat the fruit of your own labor, sitting
beneath the shadow of your own vine.


DESIGNS FOR FLOWERS.

THERE are many beautiful ways of arranging flowers, besides in our
costly vases. For example, take a basket and knit like a garter pieces
of different shades of moss colored worsted; then dip in hot water and
press them; when dry ravel nearly out, only leaving an end which can be
fastened on to the basket with sewing silk or green glace thread and a
large needle. A basket tastefully covered in this way looks as if it
were made of moss, and it retains its beauty longer; a tin dish should
be made to fit it, and painted green; keep it filled with natural
flowers. I should prefer such an ornament to costly porcelain. Many
fill such baskets with exquisite French flowers, which imitate nature
perfectly.

To form a pyramid of flowers, take three, four or five wooden bowls
according to the size you wish for your pyramid, let them be a regular
gradation in size, procure some round pieces of wood, like ribbon
blocks, graded in size, glue the tallest into the centre of the
largest bowl so that it will stand upright, and upon top of that glue
the bowl next in size, and so on to the smallest bowl. Varnish the
inside several coats; paint the outsides green and cover with moss;
some have a stand made and glued to the bottom of the largest bowl.
When filled with flowers, it is a lovely sight. Baskets made of tin
and painted green, then covered with moss, make the prettiest hanging
baskets possible. Tin rings large enough to surround vases placed
inside, and made to hold water, with little wires across the top and
painted green, when filled with flowers, form the prettiest mats in
the world; the wires keep the flowers in place. I saw one filled with
only small Rose-buds, blue Forget-me-nots and Geranium leaves. It is an
improvement to cover the outside with moss. Crosses made in the same
way are very beautiful and are appropriate to place on the grave of any
beloved friend. In that way flowers can be preserved a long time, if
there is a sufficient supply of water to preserve them.

There are innumerable ways of arranging flowers. The poorest person
can afford to purchase a tin basin, and with a little common paste
and moss, which can be found in all country places, a pretty dish
for flowers is soon made. Shells make lovely vases. The large shells
sailors polish so exquisitely to resemble mother-of-pearl, make elegant
hanging vases; bore holes on each side and hang them with strong cords.

Decorate your rooms with flowers if possible. If you have sick friends
at home or abroad, carry them flowers; it will cheer them more than you
can realize unless you too have been sick.


TO PRODUCE VARIOUS FLOWERS FROM ONE STEM.

SCOOP the pith from a small twig of elder; split it length-ways, and
fill each of the parts with seeds that produce different colored
flowers. Surround the seed with earth; tie the two bits of wood
together, and plant the whole in a pot filled with earth. The stems of
the different plants will thus be so incorporated as to exhibit to the
eye only one stem, throwing out branches with the different flowers you
have planted. By choosing the seeds of plants which germinate at the
same time, and which are nearly similar in the texture of their stems,
an ingenious person may obtain artificial plants extremely curious.


TO PRESERVE ROSES TILL WINTER.

IT is pleasant to see the Summer flowers in midwinter, and they who
cannot have Roses blooming at that period within doors can preserve
them in Summer to decorate their table in Winter. First select from
your Rose-trees the most beautiful specimens as they are just ready
to blossom; tie a piece of fine thread around the stalk of each; do
not handle the bud, or the stalk; cut it from the tree with the stalk
two or three inches in length; melt sealing-wax and quickly apply it
to the end of the stalk; the wax should only be just warm enough to
be ductile; form a piece of paper into a cone-like shape, and place
the Rose within it; twist it at the ends to exclude the air; put it in
a box, and put the box into a drawer; this is to be sure that it is
air-tight. In Winter take it out, cut off the end of the stalk, place
it in luke-warm water, and in two or three hours it will become fresh
and fragrant. If the room is very warm it will answer to put it in cold
water.

[Illustration]




Illumination.


IN a practical treatise like the present, a dissertation on the
antiquities and history of Illumination will not be looked for; nor
is there space for the amount of detail that would be necessary to
make the subject thoroughly understood. The more knowledge, however,
the student has to work upon, the purer and more complete must be his
practice; knowledge gives decision, decision leads to facility, and
facility in any art whatever, is the main object of pursuit.

For such knowledge, full, clear and accurate as it should be, we
must refer to long and learned treatises; and to the inspection of
many actual examples; since to understand clearly what is meant by
illumination, one should not only read much, but study the work itself
at every stage of its career. To look into this matter thoroughly,
reference should be made to books upon illumination. Among the best
of these books are “The Art of Illumination,” by Wyatt, and “Noel
Humphrey’s Work.” However, a few directions may be given here. To begin
with the materials.


MATERIALS.

A CAREFUL inspection of the list of water colors manufactured at the
present day, leads to the conclusion that the following colors may be
used, though some of them are similar to others in tint, &c., or can
for other reasons be superseded. These latter are marked in italics:


YELLOWS.

  Cadmium Yellow.
  Gamboge.
  Lemon Yellow.
  Mars Yellow.
  Naples Yellow.
  _Raw Sienna._
  _Yellow Ochre._

REDS.

  Brown Madder.
  Carmine.
  Crimson Lake.
  Indian Red.
  Orange Vermilion.
  _Light Red._
  _Scarlet Vermilion._
  Rose Madder.
  Rubens’ Madder.
  Vermilion.

BLUES.

  Cobalt.
  French Blue.
  _Intense Blue._
  _Indigo._
  Smalt.
  _Ultramarine Ash._

ORANGES.

  _Burnt Roman Ochre._
  Burnt Sienna.
  Mars Orange.
  Neutral Orange.

PURPLES.

  Burnt Carmine.
  Indian Purple.
  _Purple Lake._
  Purple Madder.
  _Violet Carmine._

GREENS.

  Emerald Green.
  Oxide of Chromium.
  _Olive Green._

BROWNS.

  _Burnt Umber._
  _Sepia._
  _Vandyke Brown._

BLACKS.

  _Ivory Black._
  Lamp-black.

WHITE.

  Chinese White.

The selected colors should be apportioned into five lists, as follows,
viz:

FIRST LIST.—Gamboge, cadmium yellow, crimson lake, vermilion, cobalt,
French blue, emerald green, lamp-black, Chinese white.

SECOND LIST.—Lemon yellow, gamboge, cadmium yellow, rose madder,
crimson lake, vermilion, cobalt, French blue, burnt sienna, emerald
green, vandyke brown, lamp-black, Chinese white.

THIRD LIST.—Lemon yellow, gamboge, cadmium yellow, rose madder,
crimson lake, carmine, orange vermilion, vermilion, cobalt, French
blue, burnt sienna, brown madder, emerald green, green oxide of
chromium, vandyke brown, lamp-black, Chinese white.

FOURTH LIST.—Lemon yellow, gamboge, cadmium yellow, mars yellow, rose
madder, crimson lake, carmine, orange vermilion, vermilion, Indian red,
brown madder, cobalt, French blue, neutral orange, burnt sienna, burnt
carmine, Indian purple, emerald green, green oxide of chromium, vandyke
brown, lamp-black, Chinese white.

FIFTH LIST.—Lemon yellow, gamboge, Naples yellow, cadmium yellow, mars
yellow, rose madder, Rubens’ madder, crimson lake, carmine, orange
vermilion, vermilion, Indian red, cobalt, French blue, smalt, mars
orange, burnt sienna, purple madder, burnt carmine, Indian purple,
emerald green, green oxide of chromium, vandyke brown, lamp-black,
Chinese white.

These five lists will be found to be carefully selected, and to contain
the colors best adapted for illumination.

There is not space in this book to enter into the peculiarities and
properties of these colors, which are fully discussed in several works
and treatises. The colors here recommended are permanent in character,
but chrome yellows, red lead and pure scarlet it is best to avoid, as
they are not lasting. Pure scarlet is fugitive and the others in time
turn black. “Winsor and Newton’s moist water colors” are the best for
all illuminating purposes.

Good Bristol board with a fine firm grain, and having an ivory-like
surface, but without gloss, is the best material for illuminating upon.


BRUSHES.

FEW brushes are required for illumination, but from the peculiar
character of the work, and the nature of the colors, &c., employed,
it is requisite that the right kinds should be carefully selected.
For general use, the red sable brushes in goose, duck and crow quills
should be employed; say one goose, (for large grounds,) two duck (for
ordinary work,) and three crow (for fine linings on initials, &c.) The
red sable is preferable to the brown sable, or other hair, as being
stronger and firmer at the point. An ordinary flat camel’s hair brush
will suffice for damping the back of gold paper, washing over weak
solutions of gum water or ox-gall, &c., &c.

When gold leaf is used, a soft camel’s hair brush (of swan quill size,)
may be found useful for touching, smoothing, &c. For laying down the
gold leaf, a very thin, flat brush is required, called a gilder’s tip.

Burnishers are made of agate, and the following metallic preparations
are found useful in illuminating, viz: gold paper, shell gold, saucer
gold, shell silver, saucer silver, shell aluminum, shell platina.
Silver inevitably blackens. Aluminum is preferable to silver.

Besides colors, materials to work upon, pens, brushes, burnisher,
tracer, and metallic preparations, there will be required an eraser,
compass, rule, pencil, India rubber, sponge, cotton wood, some
tracing paper and other small sundries. A bottle of gum water will be
necessary, and also one of liquid ox-gall. A little of the former,
mingled with water, is used to impart brilliancy to colors.


COLORING.

UNDER the head of materials, are given colors recommended for
illumination. Besides the colors in that list, several others are
requisite, that are only to be obtained by mixing on the palette. These
broken hues are employed in backgrounds, and as shading for the more
brilliant colors and tints on the ornamentation.

There is only space in this book for a few practical directions for
laying on such colors as are named.

First, then, everything connected with the painting should be
scrupulously clean and free from dust. Distilled water should be used,
or at least soft water that is perfectly clear. A very little gum
water, in some cases, should be added to the color as it is mixed. The
sable pencils should be in readiness, two or three, or more, according
to the work and habits of the operator.

Perhaps this is the best place to mention the manner of using the
Chinese white. On being taken from the bottle, it is found to be
exceedingly viscid, and troublesome to work, clogging the point of
the pencil. Of course it should be diluted with pure water, but as
this renders it too thin for the firm and fine lines and dots so often
wanted, it must be left a few moments to evaporate and thicken; if
still viscid, it should be thinned again and left. White thus put out
of the tube and thinned, will be found to be even better for working a
day or two afterwards than at first. All that is required, as it will
be dry, is to dip the pencil in water before working it upon the white,
and make a good point before transferring it to the illumination.
Unless these precautions be observed, the use of white will be attended
with continual vexation.

When a compound color is required, sufficient for the work in hand
should be mixed up at one time, lest, more being required, the second
tint differ from the first, when a disagreeable patchy appearance will
ensue.

Compound tints should be kept extremely clean in tone, muddy or
dirty tints being fatal to that exquisite purity of colors for which
illumination is so famed. It is a great mistake to suppose that dark
tints are necessarily somewhat dirty; · on the contrary, they can be
kept as clean and clear in tone as the most vivid combinations.

The following is a list of colors and mixed tints, stated without
technical phraseology, as far as possible:


Table of Colors and Mixed Tints.

YELLOWS.

_Vivid high-toned yellow or primrose._—Lemon yellow, yellow and white,
gamboge and white.

_Bright transparent yellow._—Gamboge.

_Rich glowing yellow._—Cadmium yellow.

_Clear transparent yellow._—Mars yellow, lemon yellow and cadmium
yellow, lemon yellow and gamboge and mars yellow.

_Rich brown yellow._—Cadmium yellow and little purple madder, cadmium
yellow and little Indian red.

_Buff yellow._—Cadmium and touch of burnt carmine, orange and little
white.

REDS.

_Vivid high-toned red._—Orange vermilion.

_Deep opaque red._—Vermilion.

_Bright transparent pink._—Rose madder, rose madder and touch of
carmine.

_Opaque pink._—White and little orange vermilion, white and little
vermilion, white and little Indian red, white and touch of carmine,
white and little rose madder.

_Rich glowing crimson._—Crimson, lake, carmine.

_Chocolate red._—Vandyke brown and carmine, vandyke brown and crimson
lake, burnt carmine and orange vermilion.

_Russet red._—Carmine and Indian red.

BLUES.

_Bright azure blue._—Cobalt, cobalt and white.

_Rich strong blue._—French blue.

_Deep dense blue._—French blue and little black.

_Brilliant purple blue._—Smalt.

ORANGES.

_Clear pure yellow orange._—Mars orange, neutral orange.

_Deeper yellow orange._—Burnt sienna.

_Intensely brilliant transparent red orange._—Carmine over a ground of
gamboge.

_Rich glowing warm orange._—Cadmium yellow and carmine, cadmium yellow
and orange vermilion, orange vermilion and little lemon yellow.

PURPLES.

_Rich cold purple_, (_violet, lavender, &c._)—Indian purple, Indian
purple and French blue, cobalt and little rose madder, cobalt and
little crimson lake, cobalt and little purple madder, French blue,
white and little rose madder, French blue and little crimson lake,
French blue and little burnt carmine.

_Rich warm purple_, (_pure maroon, &c._)—Purple madder, burnt carmine,
crimson lake and little French blue, French blue and carmine, rose
madder and little French blue, rose madder and little cobalt, crimson
lake and cobalt, burnt carmine and little French blue. White may be
added with any of these.

_Greyish lilac._—Cobalt and brown madder.

GREENS.

_Vivid high-toned green._—Emerald green, emerald green and lemon
yellow.

_Bright apple green._—Emerald green and little oxide of chromium,
emerald green little oxide of chromium and little lemon yellow, lemon
yellow and little cobalt.

_High-toned transparent green._—Gamboge and little cobalt, cadmium
and little cobalt, gamboge and little French blue, cadmium and little
French blue.

_Low-toned transparent green._—Cadmium yellow, French blue and very
little crimson lake, lemon yellow, cobalt and very little rose madder,
cobalt and little gamboge and little cadmium yellow, French blue and
little gamboge, French blue and little cadmium.

_Light opaque green._—Oxide of chromium and white.

_Deep opaque green._—Oxide of chromium.

BROWNS.

_Pure brown._—Vandyke brown.

_Rich warm brown._—Vandyke brown and little burnt carmine or crimson
lake, purple madder and touch of cadmium yellow, vandyke brown and
brown madder.

_Cold brown._—Vandyke brown and Indian purple.

_Yellow brown._—Indian red and little cadmium.

_Stone drab._—Vandyke brown and white, yellow ochre and white.

BLACK.

_Dense black._—Lamp-black.

WHITE.

_Pure white_.—Chinese white.

GREYS AND NEUTRALS.

_Grey._—Black and white.

_Purple grey._—Black and white and little cobalt.

_Slate grey._—Black and white and little crimson lake, black and white
and Indian red and cobalt.

_Silvery grey._—Black and white and rose madder.

_Clear warm neutrals for shading._—Orange vermilion and cobalt in
various proportions. Various proportions of colors may be tried,
particularly for the greys, neutrals, and quiet compounds, and the most
pleasing and suitable should be carefully noted for use.

Scientific formulas are not to be condemned, but in the present state
of the science of color, it is rash to say what is, and what is not
right, by law. In delicate harmonies, considerable license must be
allowed to what is called taste.

Whatever the numerical formulas may do in preventing us from utterly
disgusting ourselves, excellence in coloring can only be attained by
careful study of beautiful examples.

Reynolds’ maxim, of constant copying was practiced ages before by the
Italian masters; and it is so still, as the hundreds and thousands of
studies left by deceased artists testify.

Twenty good color studies, patiently copied, are worth all the
numerical formulas in the world. Nevertheless, to those who are timid
or inexperienced in judgment of color, a careful study of Chevreul or
Hay will not be without advantage, and though it will not create the
power to color harmoniously, it will aid in its development.

If any one should attempt to copy a manuscript of the fourteenth
century or thereabouts, first cut the proper kind of Bristol board the
size the page is to be, and prepare it by rubbing with pomice. Then,
having sketched it out upon a board, rule very lightly the lines for
the margin, type and initial letter. If the border be open, that is,
upon a white ground, as most of this period were, the outer marginal
line will have to be erased, so that it had better only be ruled in
pencil. Next the type must be printed according to the date, sketching
the capitals, which you will finish afterwards. The next thing to be
done is to copy the large initial letter, which must be done with great
care, testing its accuracy by tracing. If there is to be any picture,
then that must be next sketched. Your outline cannot be too delicate.
Last of all you will copy the border, and that in the following way:
fix your eye upon some prominent portion of the border in the copy,
and having ascertained its exact position and dimensions, proceed to
mark it out upon the surface of your Bristol board. Measure again the
distance from this to the next most prominent feature, and so on in
like manner until you have all the most important parts fixed in their
proper places.

Now advance to the subordinate ornamental detail and gradually fill
that in, dividing your work into small portions and taking the
greatest care to have all correct. Do not rest till you have a literal
fac-simile of the original.

Now proceed to color; but first mix a little liquid ox-gall with your
colors, which will enable you to paint with ease and certainty. The
initial letter can be first finished, using the appropriate colors.
Next begin to color the border, applying one tint wherever it is wanted
all through it, then finishing the next, and so on until you have all
the colors laid on their proper places. These you will proceed to shade
and ornament in solid Chinese white or gold; any little figures also or
grotesques should now be completed, including of course the terminal
line, generally of gold and color, which encloses the type. When all
these are finished and really accurate, both in shape and color,
if there be a picture, that comes next in order; if not, you will
put in any dots of color or flat gold which may happen to adorn the
background. This will conclude the operation of copying, and any marks
or spots which have occurred in the course of your drawing can now be
erased with bread.


DESIGN.

IF you have any enthusiasm for this art, and have studied manuscript of
the best period of illumination, as has been advised, you will not be
content simply to copy the designs of others, but will desire yourself
to try and compose them. Is it not our duty to try and develop to the
extent of our power, any art we cherish? Therefore let us consider the
subject of design and try to form some rules for our future guidance.

The first thing necessary to do, is to fix upon some existing style
of illumination to serve as a basis for any intended developments.
Of course this style must naturally be the best and purest, and
that is, as I have often said before, and as I firmly believe, that
which prevailed from the middle of the thirteenth to the end of the
fourteenth century. But you will ask of what nature ornament is to
be, and this leads to a rule, that _ornamentation must consist of
conventionalized representation of natural objects_. All true beauty
consists in the representation of, or is derived from, natural objects.
To this rule there is no exception. But nature may be represented in
two ways, either by realizing her, as far as our means will possibly
allow, or by conventionalism. In realism, we endeavor to obtain a
literal copy of the object to be represented and set no bounds to our
pursuit of this.

In conventionalism, we beforehand arrange certain limits at which to
stop, and then get as much of nature as we can within those limits.

Now in conventionalism it is to a great extent optional how far you
will realize your flowers or leaves. You may do it more or less as you
feel the occasion requires.

The principle appears to be to seize upon the leading characteristics
of the flower or form you wish to represent, and then to add as much
of the rest as you can consistently with your subject. Thus, you may
either represent a rose as an arrangement of five leaves of a certain
shape and color round a yellow or gold central spot—as was the general
mediæval type—or you may go somewhat nearer the reality and add a
few more petals, &c., so as to bring it to a closer resemblance. You
must arrange this with yourself, but as a rule observe that the more
you realize any flower the more you must proportionably increase the
quantity of conventional ornament around it, so as to make it evident
that you had voluntarily set yourself limits which you did not choose
to pass. While I am on this subject, I will take the opportunity to
advise you to make great use of leaves in your designs. Wonderful
and perfect as all nature’s work is, yet it seems as if the stamp of
perfection and divine beauty were more strongly impressed on leaves
than on any other of her productions. The thousand changing forms of
beauty with which she clothes the woods, the banks, and the very ground
we tread on, ought to be to all, but especially to lovers of beauty and
truth, objects of the purest joy and delight. Make very frequent use
of them in designing, for they ever have been and ever will be sources
of the best and most heavenly beauty. Remember always that in painting
them it is far more important to have the form and outline quite right
and true, than to imitate or approach their color, which may be left
arbitrary. Remember also that their power will be better felt by a
somewhat sparing use of them, I mean as regards not over-crowding your
page, so that though you may employ many leaves, you will have but few
of each.

The last rule of design is, that there _should be a general purpose
and meaning running throughout the ornamental detail_. You should
endeavor to carry out some idea in each border, and to this end should
reflect well, first what idea you wish to give, next how, and by what
means you may best convey it. I will not say that your meaning will
at once be plain to every one, nor indeed is it likely to be so to
more than a few, but still the working with a deliberate idea in your
mind will give a unity and completeness to your design, which will be
entirely wanting to one worked out at random, or with a view only to
prettiness—the most noxious idea it is possible to conceive, and the
rock upon which nearly all modern illuminators make shipwreck. Accustom
yourself to ask not, “is this pretty?” but, “is it _right_?” and this
habit will, I think, be a safeguard to you.

The principles of design as applied to this art, have now been
considered. There are, it is true, many other points on which I could
speak, but as my space will not allow it, I have chosen those which
are the most important, and against which there is to beginners the
greatest temptation to err. Careful study of the best manuscript you
have an opportunity of seeing, must be your guide on other points.
But as an encouragement let me tell you, that if you have any talent
for design, and will take the trouble diligently to _think_ over the
directions here given and try them by such fourteenth century examples
as may fall in your way, I do not think that you can go wrong in any
material point. Difference of opinion and taste there must always
be, but as long as we grasp the truth and resolutely cling to our
landmarks, our steps cannot go far astray.

These foregoing directions were prepared for this work by a lady who
excels in the art of illumination.

[Illustration: FINIS]




House and Home Arts.


DECALCOMANIE will be appreciated and enjoyed by any one who takes
pleasure in making tasteful articles for gifts, or for contributions
to fairs, or in adding new graces to the parlor. It consists in
ornamenting vases and boxes with oil paintings. The process saves
a great deal of labor, and when the work is well done, very close
examination is necessary to detect the difference between hand
paintings and the Decalcomanie, particularly if the pictures are
retouched, or tiny sprays of moss, small leaves, or flowers are added
in water colors. The designs can be transferred to wood, porcelain,
leather, silk, glass, metal, paper, etc.

The designs are printed in oil colors, on the surface of paper, which
has been previously prepared with a composition easily soluble in
water,—or in fact the printing is entirely on this composition,
the paper merely serving as a back to give support to the thin film
on which the design is printed. By a process hereafter described,
these beautiful designs in oil colors may be perfectly transferred
to the surface of any article which it is desirable to ornament,
such as vases, card-cases, porte-monnaies, work-boxes, needle-books,
toilet-cushions, lamp-shades, and hundreds of other things too numerous
to mention; and when nicely executed, the work equals the finest
painting. Beautiful bouquets may in this way, be transferred to silk
for toilet-cushions and perfume sachets.

When applied to china, porcelain or other similar substances, it may be
freely washed with warm water without injury, and is in every respect
as durable as oil painting.

Materials.

The necessary materials are as follows: _cementing varnish_,
_protecting varnish_, two or three _camel’s hair brushes_ of various
sizes, (these should be of fine quality, as the cheaper ones never
have good points), a glass of _clear water_, a small vial of benzine
or burning fluid for cleaning the varnish brushes; and be careful and
procure suitably prepared pictures.

Directions.

First, with a fine brush, apply the cementing varnish to every part
of the picture, following the outline neatly without running over on
the white paper. After applying the varnish let it dry a minute, then,
holding the picture to the light, take a larger brush and dampen the
back with water, being careful to wet the size of the design only.
Before the picture has time to expand much, apply the picture to the
article to be ornamented, firmly pressing every part; dampen again with
water, after which remove the paper. To remove the paper, commence at
one corner and carefully raise it, keeping close watch that none of
the design adheres to the paper. If a piece, however small, is seen
attached to the paper, immediately replace the paper and again press
that part to the article and perhaps dampen a little more. Having
entirely removed the paper, draw a damp cloth smoothly over the finger
and firmly press every part, using great care that no air bubbles
remain under the large surfaces. The day after the transfer, carefully
wash the design with cold water, and when perfectly dry, lightly apply
the protecting varnish to the design. The above directions are strictly
applicable to ornamenting only such articles as can be washed.

In ornamenting any delicate substance, such as silk, great care must
be observed in dampening the back, in order to dampen only the exact
size of the design; as, if the preparation on the paper is dampened
around the picture, it will soil the silk. Of course the washing above
mentioned must be omitted; and oftentimes the varnishing may also be
omitted to advantage, as its object is simply to render the painting
more durable, where it is to be subjected to use or exposed to the
weather.

In order to avoid soiling delicate substances, some persons have
adopted the following expedients:—After applying the cementing varnish
to the picture, and before dampening the back, take the water brush,
and thoroughly wet the face of the paper all around the design. This
will soften the preparation, which may be removed by carefully touching
the surface with a wet cloth. The cloth, being wet, will not stick to
the varnish if it comes in contact with it. After this operation, the
process is the same as before described, except that some of the fine
parts near the edge may require retouching with the cementing varnish.

For ornamenting any dark substances, such as black silk or a rosewood
box, the picture is differently prepared. After the picture has been
printed in all its colors, the whole design is entirely covered with
gold leaf or a preparation of white lead, which is merely to give the
picture its proper effect, by preventing the dark surface from showing
through, which it would do at every light part were it not for this
backing. But if it is desirable to use some pictures not backed on a
dark ground, it may be done by covering the design with a preparation
of fine white lead, called white grounding. The grounding must be
allowed to dry, and then the process is the same as before. In applying
your pictures to any article, face the light, and, holding the picture
before you, the design can be seen from the back, and thus correctly
placed in position.


ENGRAVED BOXES.

THE box should be white or light straw-color in order to show the faint
impression to advantage. It should be varnished five or six times in
succession, and suffered to dry thoroughly each time. While the last
coat of varnish is yet so fresh that your finger will adhere to it,
the engraving must be put on, the picture side next to the varnish.
The engraving must be prepared in the following manner:—All the white
paper must be cut off close to the edges of the engraving, which must
be laid on a clean table, with the picture downward, and moistened all
over with a clean sponge. It must then be placed between two leaves of
blotting paper, to dry it a little. Before putting it on the box, take
great care to have it even, and determine exactly where you wish it
to be. Lay one edge of the print, picture downward, upon the varnish,
and gradually drop it to its place, passing the hand successively over
the back of the print in such a manner as to drive out all the air,
and prevent the formation of blisters. Then carefully touch it all
over with a linen cloth, so as to be sure every part adheres to the
varnish. Leave it until it is thoroughly dry. Then moisten the back
of the engraving with a clean sponge, and rub it lightly backward and
forward with the fingers, so as to remove the moistened paper in small
rolls. When the picture begins to appear, take great care lest you rub
through, and take off some of the impression. As soon as you perceive
there is danger of this, leave it to dry. In drying, the engraving will
disappear, because it is still covered by a slight film of paper. You
might think it mere white paper; but give it a coat of varnish, and it
will become quite transparent. Should you by accident have removed any
part of the engraving, touch it with India ink, and gum water, in order
that no white spots may appear; but when you put on your second coat of
varnish you must take care to pass very lightly over the spots you have
retouched. The box should be varnished as many as three times after the
engraving has been placed on it, and suffered to dry thoroughly each
time. The white alcoholic varnish is the best. It should be put on in
the sunshine, or near a warm stove. After the last coat is well dried,
sift a little pulverized rotten stone through coarse muslin, and rub it
on with linseed oil and a soft rag; after being well rubbed, cleanse
the box thoroughly with an old silk handkerchief or soft linen rag.
Some persons say that a very thin sizing of nice glue should be put on
the box before it is varnished at all; others say it is not necessary.
This work requires great patience and care; but the effect is very
beautiful, and pays for the trouble.


CORAL FLOWERS AND BASKETS.

FORM baskets, flowers, and sprays of all shapes and kinds, of
bonnet-wire already wound with thread. Then take one ounce of resin and
dissolve it in a brass pan with two drachms of the finest vermilion,
and thoroughly mix them; then take your basket, twigs, &c., and dip
them into the solution till they are well dyed. Some persons dissolve
red sealing-wax in alcohol, and form coral, powder the wax, and fill in
as much as the alcohol will dissolve.


IMITATION OF INLAID IVORY.

HAVE your fancy table, work-box, &c., made of smooth polished white
wood, such as satin wood or maple; sketch upon it such figures as
castles, men, women, wreaths of flowers, &c., as you fancy; then color
all, except the figures you have drawn, with dead black. It then, if
neatly and tastefully finished, looks like ebony inlaid with ivory.


ALUM BASKETS.

SUCCESS in these baskets depends somewhat upon chance; for the crystals
will sometimes form irregularly, even when the utmost care is taken.
Dissolve alum in a little more than twice as much water as will be
necessary to cover the basket, handle and all. Put in as much alum as
the water will dissolve. The water should be hot. When the water is
entirely saturated, pour it into a sauce-pan or earthen jar, (by no
means put it into an iron vessel), and slowly boil it, until it is
nearly evaporated. The basket should then be suspended from a little
stick, laid across the top of the jar, in such a manner that both
basket and handle will be covered by the solution. It must be set
away in a cool place, where not the slightest motion will disturb the
formation of the crystals.

The frame may be made in any shape you fancy. It is usually made of
small wire, woven in and out like basket-work; but a common willow
basket may be used for a frame. Whether it be wire or willow, a rough
surface must be produced by winding every part with thread or worsted.
Bonnet-wire already covered can be used, and the trouble of winding
the basket avoided. Bright yellow crystals may be produced by boiling
gamboge, saffron or tumeric in the alum solution. Litmus boiled in will
give bright red crystals; logwood will form purple. The colors will
be more or less deep according to the quantity used. Splendid blue
crystals may be obtained by preparing the sulphate of copper, commonly
called blue vitriol, in the same manner as alum is prepared. Care must
be taken not to drop it on your clothes.


PAINTING ON GLASS.

SOME of the works which profess to teach the art of painting on glass
contain directions for staining large windows in churches and halls;
others merely give the process of producing the more common paintings,
such as are carried about the streets for sale. These seem to have
been much in vogue about a century since, as all the “Young Artist’s
Assistants” of that day contain the mode of painting them. They direct
us to fix a mezzotinto print upon the back of a sheet of glass, and to
remove the paper by wetting and rubbing, leaving the impression of the
print, which is afterwards to be painted in broad washes; the ink of
the print giving the shadows. The picture being then turned over, the
glazed side becomes the front, and the colors first laid on are, of
course, nearest the eye. This mode of painting resembles the style of
Grecian painting, that being painted from the back, and the shading is
the ink of the engraving.

The methods by which glass is stained are scientific; they require
some knowledge of chemistry, and such apparatus as must preclude the
practice of this branch of art as an amusement. It may be interesting,
however, to know something of the process. The glass being, at first,
colorless, a drawing is made upon it, and the painting is laid on
with mineral substances, the vehicle being a volatile oil, which soon
evaporates. The sheets of glass are then exposed to a powerful heat,
until they are so far melted that they receive the colors into their
own substances. Enamel painting is done on the same principle. This
is a time of great anxiety to the artist, as with all possible care,
valuable paintings, both in glass and enamel, are frequently spoiled in
the proving, or vitrification. The art seems to have been lost during
several centuries, but it has of late been successfully revived; and
large windows have been executed for churches and gothic halls, which
almost vie with the fine old specimens in the cathedrals, in point of
color, while they far excel them in other respects.

The branch of the art which may be treated as an accomplishment is
the decoration of glass, flower-stands, lamp-shades, and similar
articles, with light and elegant designs. Flowers, birds, butterflies
and pleasing landscapes, afford an extensive range of subjects, which
are suitable to this style of ornamental painting. The glasses may be
procured ready ground. The outline may be sketched in with a black lead
pencil; the lead can be washed off with a sponge when the colors are
dry. The whole of the colors employed must be transparent, and ground
in oil; opaque, or body colors, will not answer the purpose.

They may be purchased in small bladders, only requiring to be tempered
with fine copal or mastic varnish, and a very little nut oil, to be
ready for use. Blue is produced by Prussian blue; red, by scarlet or
crimson lake; yellow, by yellow lake or gamboge; green, by verdigris,
or mineral green, or a mixture of Prussian blue and gamboge; purple, by
a mixture of lake and Prussian blue; reddish brown, by burnt sienna;
and all the other tints may be obtained by combinations; for white,
or such parts as are required to be transparent, without color, the
varnish only should be employed. A very chaste and pleasing effect may
be produced by painting the whole design in varnish, without color.

It is an advantage to this style of painting, that but few colors are
required; as from the nature of the subjects, and their purpose as
ornaments, brilliancy is more desirable than a nice gradation of tints.
The work must, of course, be carefully dried, but may afterwards be
cleaned with a sponge and cold water.


PAINTING ON VELVET.

PAINTING on velvet as well as on glass is an old art revived. No art
that is really beautiful in itself will pass away entirely. As these
paintings are very pleasing to the eye, and easy of execution, it is
well to know how to paint them. The following directions are taken from
a reliable English work.

The colors for this style of painting are sold at the drawing material
warehouses, in a liquid state and prepared for use. In addition to
these, a brilliant rose color is obtained from the pink saucers, by
dropping a little weak gum water upon the color, and rubbing it with
a brush. A deep yellow may also be produced by pouring a few drops of
boiling water upon a small quantity of hay saffron.

It is necessary to mix gum water with all the colors made, to prevent
their spreading into each other; gum dragon is the best for this
purpose. The brushes used are called scrubs; they consist of a small
stick, with a camel’s hair brush cut off quite short at one end, and at
the other, a brush of bristles of a much harder description. A small
box of black lead is necessary, and a piece of list rolled tightly
round, to the diameter of about two inches, to be used as a sort of
brush with the black lead, for making outlines in the manner we shall
presently direct. A piece of linen rag, to wipe the brushes on, should
also be provided.

The most brilliant flowers, fruits, shells, birds, &c., are well
adapted to this style of painting. The outline of the subject may be
sketched in pencil on the velvet, which is of such a very delicate
nature, that the greatest nicety is necessary to keep it in a state
of neatness. Care should also be taken that the sketch is correctly
made, as an error cannot be effaced by rubbing out, as on paper. It is
a safer method, however, to make the sketch on drawing-paper, and to
prick the outline very closely with a fine needle; then, the velvet
being previously nailed on a flat piece of wood of a proper size, the
pricked pattern may be laid over it, the roll of list dipped into the
black lead powder, and rubbed regularly over the pattern from side to
side; be careful to touch every part, and on removing the pattern, a
perfect outline in black dots will appear on the velvet.

Where a set of articles of the same pattern is undertaken, this is a
very good plan, as it ensures accuracy, and saves the trouble of making
separate sketches.

Even those who have no knowledge of drawing on paper may produce a
design on velvet, with ease and correctness, by tracing off against a
window, or by means of tracing paper, any drawing or print which they
wish to copy, and pricking the tracing on the velvet in the manner just
described. In order to keep the margin of the velvet from being soiled
in the progress of painting, a piece of thick paper should be laid
over the whole, and an aperture cut in the middle, sufficiently large
to expose the part to be worked on. Each brush should be kept for that
color alone to which it has once been appropriated.

A small quantity of the color about to be used should be poured into a
little cup, and a drop of gum water added, and stirred with the stick
of a pencil prior to its being taken on the brush. The mode of its
application is so simple, that a short description of the execution of
a single flower will suffice to give an idea of the process of painting
almost any other subject on velvet. A very small portion of color is to
be taken upon the brush, and the darkest part of the leaf touched with
it; the brush is then to be dipped in water, and the color gradually
softened to the edge; each leaf ought to be colored separately, and the
darkest parts in the centre of the flowers may be finished with a small
brush without softening. India ink is used to make the dark shadows of
crimson flowers. The veins, and all the petals of flowers, and all the
fine lines, should be done with a pen. Each leaf, as it is shadowed,
should be brushed with the hard end of a brush, that way of the velvet
in which the pile runs most easily, and then in the contrary direction,
so as to set it up again to become dry. A deeper shade should never
be added to a leaf or flower until the color previously laid on is
perfectly set, or the two colors will spread and run into each other,
this will be prevented by the gum, if sufficient time can be allowed
for each shade to dry before a subsequent one is applied.

When the piece is finished, and quite dry, it should be brushed over
with a small, round brush, about two inches in diameter, with hard
bristles of an equal length, to raise up such parts of the pile as may
have been flattened in the process of painting.

Toilet-sets, sofa-cushions, fancy tables, pin-cushions, and a variety
of articles may be ornamented in this way.


CASTING IN PLASTER, SULPHUR, ETC.

TAKING the impression of coins, medals, &c., is, independently of its
utility, a most interesting amusement. This art is of considerable
importance to collectors of antique coins, &c. It is often difficult,
and always expensive, to purchase superior specimens, of which,
however, exact models may be obtained by casting, without the
slightest injury to the originals. The mould is made in the following
manner:—Take a strip of paper, a quarter or third of an inch wide;
roll it twice tight around the rim of the coin, or gem, of which a cast
is intended to be taken, and fasten the end with very stiff gum-water,
which will hold it instantly. Rub a very little oil, with a camels-hair
pencil, over the coin, in order to prevent the plaster from sticking;
then mix some fine plaster of Paris, with as much water as will make
it almost as thick as treacle; apply it quickly to the coin, on which
it will be held by the paper rim. It sets almost instantly, and may be
taken off in a few hours; but the longer it remains undisturbed the
better. The mould which is thus obtained is the reverse of the coin;
that is, the impression is concave, like a seal. When the moulds are
so dry that they will not wrinkle a piece of paper laid flat upon the
surface, let them be well saturated with the best boiled linseed oil,
placing the moulds with their surface upward, that the whole of the oil
may be absorbed. They must be covered from dust, and nothing should
touch their surface, lest they suffer injury. Moulds, well prepared in
this manner, and dried about two days after being oiled, will stand a
long time, for the casting of either plaster or sulphur. When used,
either Florence oil or a little hog’s lard (the latter to be preferred)
should be applied very tenderly over the mould with a little of the
finest cotton wool, and the cotton wool, without lard, afterwards
passed lightly over the surface, to leave as little as possible of the
unctuous matter upon the mould, that the casts may be the finer. Put
paper around them, as was before done to the coin; pour on plaster in
the same manner, and a fac-simile of the original will be produced.

Good casts may be made of sulphur, melted in an iron ladle, either
pure, or colored with a little red lead or vermilion powdered and
stirred up with it. The moulds and casts are made in the same manner
as with plaster of Paris, only that the sulphur must be poured on the
mould when hot, and water, instead of oil, must be used, to prevent
adhesion. Sulphur makes the best moulds for plaster casts, and _vice
versa_—as similar substances can seldom be prevented, by either water
or oil, from adhering, in some degree, to each other. Plaster cannot be
used twice; that is, old or spoiled casts cannot be powdered and again
employed; for the moment the material is moistened, being a species of
lime, it is no longer plaster, without being reburnt.

Another way of making casts of almost any color, is with a strong
solution of isinglass; it must be used when quite hot; and it is so
thin that a box, exactly fitting the rim of the coin, is required,
otherwise it will escape. It may be colored with saffron, wood, &c.

Very beautiful impressions may be taken by pouring melted wax upon the
metal, which comes off easily when the wax and metal are perfectly
cold; but any one attempting this had better try it first upon a penny,
or other coin of little value.

Impressions may also be taken in wax, which, for this purpose, should
be rendered pliable by kneading it with the hand before the fire, a
little oil having been previously mixed with it. When softened to about
the consistency of putty, lay it and press it close down on the coin,
the form of which will then be perfectly obtained.

The following is another mode of taking impressions:—Procure tin or
lead foil, as thin as possible, place it on the coin, and with a pin’s
head, or any small, smooth instrument, work it into every part; then
take it off, revert it into a shallow box, and pour plaster into its
concave side; a durable plaster cast is thus obtained, covered with tin
foil, which will resemble silver.


LEATHER WORK.

“THE Complete Guide to Ornamental Leather Work” gives very elaborate
directions, the more practical of which are given in this chapter in
connection with suggestions derived from other sources. Being quite
absorbed at one time in imitating various kinds of flowers and leaves
in leather, and in ornamenting and staining wood to represent beautiful
carved work,—the writer of this examined the books on the subject, and
tried many elaborate methods, and finally went to a cabinet-maker and
learned the simplest mode of staining and varnishing. Her leather work
proved to be quite as durable, and was pronounced as handsome, as if it
had been covered with various coats of stiffening.

The kind of leather used for general purposes is basil; it should be
selected of an even texture and of a light color, as the light colored
will stain better than the dark. It should be soft and free from
blemishes.

The skiver leather is used for making grapes, or very small leaves and
flowers, and can be obtained at the same place as the basil leather;
this kind is also useful for thin stems and any minute portion of the
work.

The whole skins are very expensive, and any one who wishes to
experiment can obtain for quite a small sum pieces of leather from
trunk-makers and saddlers, (who call it sheepskin instead of basil;)
you can engage them to save you all their pieces; in this way you
can obtain all you will wish to use. You can also purchase strips
of thicker leather at the same places, to ornament the edge of your
brackets, &c.; you can cut the edge of the leather in scollops, points,
&c., with chisels and gouges, and nail it round the shelf or glue it
on, the scollops, &c., hanging down; it will look exactly like wood
when properly stained. Then nail your flowers to that. Pieces of skiver
can also be obtained from the book-binders. To form your leaves and
flowers, you must sketch your pattern from nature, on pasteboard.
Then dip your leather in cold water for half a minute (not longer,
unless the leather is unusually thick;) it should then be taken from
the water and pressed in a linen cloth until the surface is nearly
dry. Being thus prepared, lay it quite flat on a board, and place upon
it your pasteboard pattern, and trace it. While the leather is wet,
cut out your leaf with sharp scissors or a shoe-maker’s knife. The
pattern may be drawn before the leather is wet, and if sharp tools
are used the leaf can be cut before wetting it; and by drawing one
pattern and nailing several pieces of leather firmly on a board, with
chisels, gouges and hammer, you can cut a number of leaves at once,
and then neatly trim them with the scissors. All common leaves, such
as grape, ivy, or convolvulus, are more easily cut in this way; rose
leaves and grape leaves are cut better with the scissors. You should
have a variety of sizes of leaves. To vein the leaves you should copy
nature, and mark them with a brad awl or knitting needle, or the point
of the scissors; press heavily for thick veins and lightly for the
finer veins; by using the two points of your scissors slightly spread
apart, you can form the raised veins; a hard steel pen can be used
for the smaller veins. Being veined, the leaves should be bent and
moulded into the required shape. Then they should be dried quickly,
as it hardens them better. Some persons stiffen them when dry by
brushing over a stiffening made of two ounces of Australian red gum,
six ounces of orange shellac, half a pint of spirits of wine, mixed
cold, and when dissolved, strained for use. It is not necessary to use
any such preparation when your leather work is sufficiently hardened
by drying; take some asphaltum varnish and stain it carefully all over
with a brush. This varnish you can buy ready mixed, or you can get
the asphaltum, powder it, and dissolve it in spirits of turpentine;
when well dried it will probably need a second coat, possibly a third,
depending on the color you wish, whether dark or light; when well
dried, varnish the work with copal varnish, and dry it thoroughly. Then
stain your wood (or you can have it stained at the cabinet-makers,
as you prefer.) You can stain even common pine wood by the following
process: first, stain with asphaltum the color you desire; then varnish
with three coats of copal varnish, having each well dried; when it is
dry and hard, rub it down with powdered pumice stone, and wash off
with clear cold water. Then arrange and nail, or glue, on your leather
flowers or fruit. When all is complete, finish up with a coat of copal
varnish carefully brushed on.

To make stems and tendrils: cut strips as long as the leather will
allow; soak them well in water for a few minutes until they feel very
soft; take them out, wipe the water from the surface, roll them and dry
them; if required to be very stiff, add inside a piece of wire; when
very thick ones are required the leather may be cut wider. Tendrils are
made in the same manner as stems, using skiver instead of the ordinary
leather; dry them quickly, then take a strip, damp it and wind it round
a brad awl or knitting needle, taking care to fasten both ends, so that
it cannot fly off; dry it by the fire, then remove it from the awl or
needle, and a delicately formed tendril will be the result.

Every kind of flower can be imitated. Oak leaves and acorns are easily
made, and many prefer them to flowers. Take several sizes of natural
oak leaves, and draw the pattern on pasteboard, and pencil them as the
natural leaf is veined. These you can keep always ready to copy your
leather from. The natural acorn can be used, by leaving a little of the
stem on the cup, on which to glue a longer stem of leather; then glue
the acorn into the cup, and varnish and stain. If you can obtain sprays
of acorns, and glue each acorn to its cup and glue on a bit of leather
to the end of the stem, to nail to your frame, they are the most
desirable. The acorns gathered from the shrub oak are the prettiest.

Convolvulus is a vine most commonly imitated. The leaves and tendrils
are very simple, and the flower is easily shaped over the top of a
bottle. First, cut a round piece the size of a half dollar, and punch
a hole in the centre after it is wet, then shape from the natural
flower; the cup can be formed in the neck of the bottle, and the rest
by rolling the edges over the rim of the top of the bottle.

Ivy is easily made. The berries can be formed from slack baked bread;
take it and roll into little berries, then stick in each a piece of
wire (that pulled from wire taste is the best, as it is wound with
thread,) and in forming the branch wind the wires together with a strip
of leather. When the berries have hardened, stain them.

Grapes are made of skiver, and either small clay marbles or dry peas.
First, wet your skiver, then form your bunch of grapes, by pushing one
after another firm into the pliant leather, and fasten around each a
linen thread, and draw them with it close together, shaping your bunch
according to the size you wish. They so perfectly imitate carved wood
that persons familiar with carving may be deceived by them. By the
exercise of ingenuity and your imitative qualities you can accomplish
very satisfactory results. Parts of the work may be gilded, if you
prefer. For instance, you may gild your acorns, grapes or ivyberries.
Bronzing is pretty for some kinds of work. It is done by sprinkling or
rubbing bronzing powder on the work before the last coat of varnish is
dry.

[Illustration: SKELETON BRACKET.]

Autumn leaves can be imitated by using finely powdered colors,
and mixing them to the consistence of cream, with the following
medium:—Mix the white of an egg with 2 oz. of pure distilled vinegar;
put them into a bottle and shake them well together whenever you wish
to mix your colors; or mix them with parchment size warmed, or a weak
solution of gum-Arabic; in either case, varnish with a quick drying
pale varnish. Oil colors will not answer.

Pieces of furniture easily ornamented by leather are book cases,
etageres, brackets, picture frames, work boxes, screens, music and
watch stands and fancy tables, &c., &c.

[Illustration: DESIGN FOR A BRACKET.]

The edges of frames of all kinds may be neatly ornamented by taking
two strips about seven-eighths of an inch wide, cut them as long as
possible, and stain them; when ready for use, nail them together to the
edge of the frame, then twist them round so as to form a point, and
nail again, and so on all around, crossing them each time. Brackets
need to be formed not only artistically, but strong. I will give here a
design for the framework, before the leather ornaments are nailed on.
The strips of wood must be entirely covered with the leather foliage;
it adds to the appearance of the whole.

To gild the upper edge, I will also give a pretty design for an oak and
ivy bracket. This is intended to imitate old oak, and should be stained
very dark. The oak stem should be made of very thick wire, cut in the
desired lengths, and covered with leather, and bent to resemble gnarled
oak, as naturally as possible; fasten oak leaves and acorns at the back
of the wires and on the wood-work, as shown in the skeleton bracket,
then attach the ivy tendrils, leaves and berries around the oak stems,
and the bracket is complete. Other and very beautiful designs will
readily occur to persons who engage in this delightful recreation.




CIGAR-BOXES MADE USEFUL.

BEAUTIFUL fancy boxes can be made from cigar-boxes, if the cover is
preserved whole. Small sizes are the most desirable. Toilet, glove,
handkerchief, gentlemen’s collar, note paper and work-boxes, besides
many other varieties, are easily manufactured. The materials required,
most of which can be purchased at the paper box manufactories,
are:—All kinds of fancy enamel paper, in sheets; gold or silver paper,
and the gold or fancy beadings, which can be bought in strips; small
enamel German pictures; plain or water-colored paper, or colored silk
and satins, for the lining; gilded corner-pieces, and claw-feet are an
addition; perfume powder, narrow taste, &c.

First, you must fasten the lid firmly by pasting a strip of linen along
the edges of the lid and box, inside, as well as outside; it holds the
lid firm, and acts as a hinge; paste on each side bits of ribbon to
support the lid, then glue in the lining. For very nice boxes, silk
or satin, fluted, is a great addition. Plait it above and below on a
narrow piece of paper, and paste the edges down; then take an oblong
piece of silk and another of paper, place a piece of cotton wool on
the paper sprinkled with perfume powder, then cover with the silk, and
baste the paper over the edge, pasting the whole on the lid in the
center. After you have covered it, paste neatly round it a gold beading
(or bind the edges of the box first with gold paper); close the box
when the inside is finished, and commence on the outside. Some persons
take out the bottom of the box in lining it, as it is easier to paste
it smoothly, and then nail it in its place. Cover the whole outside of
the box with polished enamel paper (Japanese paper is very beautiful,
but expensive,) and cover the bottom of the box; then bind the edges of
the box with gold paper, and place beading on the edge where it meets
the colored paper. The styles may be varied by pasting gold beading
in stripes all over the box; ornament the sides, if you prefer, with
pictures. On the lid, gold corner-pieces, besides the beading, are an
improvement. In the center place some pretty picture, varnish it with
map varnish, and then frame the picture with a gold beading. A loop
of ribbon should be pasted on the lid to raise it by, and your box is
finished. If your box is for gloves or handkerchiefs, you may cut out
in old Roman or English letters, in gold paper, “Gantes” or “Mouchoir,”
and paste them on the front side of the box. Pin-cushions could be
fastened on the top of toilet boxes.

The pictures and gilding that come on linen or cambric goods may be
used for this purpose. Common flour paste is the best; a little common
glue mixed in while boiling improves the paste. Mucilage can be used
to glue on the beading. The paper should be thoroughly wet with paste.
Begin to paste smoothly from the center, in order to keep out all air.


POTICHIMANIE.

POTICHIMANIE is the art of imitating painting on glass or China. The
most beautiful of the Chinese porcelain, Sevres, Japanese or Etruscan
vases, can be so closely imitated, that none but connoisseurs can
discover at first sight, the difference. The work is attractive, and
very simple; the materials employed are few, and inexpensive.

First, select some plain glass vases, resembling in shape and size the
particular style of China you wish to represent. You can have vases of
any shape blown and fashioned for you at the glass houses.

Select your colored figures, representing the style of China you wish
to imitate; let them be rich, and clear in their colors. You will need
two or three small brushes, such as painters use, some strong gum
water, and a bottle of varnish. Use paint for the groundwork of the
color you wish to represent. The ground color of the Chinese porcelain
is in general a greenish white; the Sevres a bluish white; while the
Etruscan is a pale yellow. These three colors are generally all that
are wanted. A delicate pink is sometimes used. For any one kind of
vase, only one ground color is necessary. A pair of very fine pointed
scissors will also be required.

Then proceed to cut out your figures with great care; if you can cut
a trifle within your figures, all the better, for no white edges must
be visible. When they are all cut, arrange them on a sheet of paper
in the order in which they are to be placed in the vase, and gum them
very evenly and carefully on the colored side; let them lay until the
gum rather thickens and the paper on which they are colored softens;
then take them up carefully and place them in their proper places on
the inside of your vase; press them carefully with a bit of old linen
tight to the glass, excluding all air between them and the glass,
otherwise bubbles will be formed, and the work will be spoiled. When
all the pictures are arranged, wipe the glass clean, except where it is
covered by the pictures. After the work is dry and clean, varnish the
back of the prints, and paint the inside of the vase with the ground
color. Some persons pour it in the vase, and let it run around, and
then carefully brush it on; some put it on near the pictures by gently
tapping the glass with the brush. Great care must be taken not to let
the paint run under the paintings. The antennae of butterflies and
other minute objects may be imitated in gold, or by drawing them on the
glass with gum water and sprinkling them with gold bronze powder. This
must be done before the ground paint is laid. Gold stars scattered over
some kinds of vases may improve them. You can buy sheets of appropriate
designs already colored. If you prefer to color them yourself, you must
be sure and have your colors clear and bright; the brighter they are
the better they will appear. Where gold is introduced, it is better
to use the shell or prepared gold. It is applied in the same manner
as water colors, and may be used with good effect, in borders, single
ornaments, flowers, insects, and to fill up when no other color is
introduced. This work may be used in various ways to decorate your
homes. The inside of your vase should be varnished, to give it the
smoothness of China, and you can have the rim gilded. If several coats
of sizing are applied, the vase may be filled with water without injury
to the paint; but you can fit cups to the vases, in which to put water
for flowers. Hall lamps, windows, &c., are decorated in the same
manner, except that no ground color is used. Cabinet boxes, tables, and
a great variety of other articles, both useful and ornamental, may,
with a little ingenuity and taste, be rendered extremely elegant.


ORNAMENTS IN RICE SHELL-WORK.

THE rice shells are brought from the West Indies, and are sold by
measure, or by the box, at the conchological repositories. They can be
bought already prepared for use, but are more expensive in that form.
To prepare the rough shell for use, you must first take a long pin and
free the interior of each shell from all grit or dirt; next with your
scissors clip the extreme tip of the shell so as to leave a tiny hole
like the eye of a needle. This must be carefully done or the shell
will be spoiled, or your eyes may be seriously injured by the flying
fragments. Practice soon enables one to clip them rapidly and evenly.

It is advisable to have at hand a number of small card boxes, to hold
your articles. In clipping, it is well to sort the shells by the sizes,
and lay them in separate boxes. Small, flat, white shells, nearly
transparent, add to the beauty of the shell-work. These must be bored
by a sharp needle near the stem. When all are clipped, pour over them
cold water, with a little soda and castile soap. The latter should be
shredded, and mixed in the proportion of half an ounce to each pint
of water. Then cover your pan and place it near a good fire, or in an
oven; let it remain till scalding hot, stirring now and then; then
take it away, and rub the shells gently with your hands; then pour off
the water and rinse the shells; add a fresh supply of water and soap
only, and repeat the same process; after being again rinsed in clear
water take a few shells, fold them in a soft towel to dry them, and
afterwards rub them with a silk handkerchief; then place them in a dish
near the fire and shake them occasionally till they are dry. Then place
them in a box ready for use. They should appear polished and pearly
white. Too much soap, soda, or heat will turn them yellow. Too great
heat in drying will cause them to be brittle and crack, but they must
be dry before using.

Next you must procure silver wire. This can be bought at gold and
silver bullion makers, or at musical instrument makers. You need
several sizes, the very finest thread wire to wind around the stems, a
size to twist in the shell and another for stems.

The largest shells are better for baskets and heavier work, the middle
size and smallest for flowers and leaves. Each kind should have its own
box. Into one box cut some two or three hundred pieces of middle sized
wire, about two and a half inches in length. You should collect for
use various materials, such as floss silk, fine wire chenille, roman
pearl beads, (the solid or grain-like bead is preferable,) coral beads,
or turquoise, pink, green or yellow, red flower seeds, velvet, satin,
or silver leaves and silver bullion. Having collected materials for a
wreath and sprays of various flowers, commence your work by stringing
your shells on your bits of wire. Turn the wire over the shell; hold
the folded wire between thumb and finger of the right hand, and turn
the shell round and round until the wires are firmly twisted together.
Very soon you will be astonished at the rapidity with which you string
and twist your shells. They look like this cut, when prepared. Much
time will be saved by keeping your different sized shells separate.
Having wired several hundred, you can proceed to prepare a leaf.

[Illustration: WIRED SHELLS.]

The cut at the head of page 122 shows the leaf when made. It takes
from five to fifteen or twenty shells to form a leaf; the number
depends on the size of the leaf. The smallest shell forms the apex, the
others graduated in size by pairs. Then take your shells and bind them
together, one by one, with the finest wire or floss silk, leaving out a
small portion of the twisted wire, gradually increasing the piece left
out, as the plate indicates, leaving all the openings of the shell all
one way; bind the stem firmly, leaving no ends of wire, as they catch
in everything, besides looking untidy.

[Illustration: SHELL-LEAF.]

To form a flower or bud, take one of the lengths of the wire, thread
on a shell, and then a pearl bead, then a second shell, and twist the
wire firm. The place of the bead is between the points of the two
shells, and both openings meet and are not seen. The figure below shows
a simple flower composed of five wired shells, firmly twisted together
down to the extremity. A double flower is composed of eighteen shells,
twelve small ones, and six of a middle size. These latter are arranged
as in the single flower. The twelve are made into four leaflets. A few
pearl beads in the center of the flower improves it. It is easy to
shape them as you wish by bending the wires. A simple flower may be
arranged like the spokes of a wheel.

[Illustration: SHELL-FLOWER.]

Wheat ears (see cut on next page) may be made of any number of shells,
from eight to thirty, one taken as an apex, then a pair set on either
side of it and one in the center, and other pairs successively to
the end, binding all firmly to the points of the shells, and putting
in here and there three quarter inch length of middle sized wire to
resemble the beards. Ornamental groups can be made by threading good
sized shells on middle sized wires, twisting them together and winding
them on a fine knitting needle. When drawn out they have a spiral form.
Bind several thus formed together at the ends. Their dancing, wavy
motion adds to the gracefulness of your spray or wreath. The white,
round shells used as leaves are very pretty; even whole flowers are
often made of them. Wire chenille and colored beads increase the effect.

[Illustration: WHEAT EARS.]

Neatness and grace must be studied, care must be used to avoid cutting
off the thread wire, or floss, any oftener than possible. In making
wreaths and sprays every one must exercise his or her own taste.
Infinite varieties of forms can be designed; you can trim a head-dress
exquisitely with them.

I advise young ladies to try their skill. It is fascinating work and
the effect is beautiful. Bridal wreaths formed of the rice shells,
Roman pearls, white chenille, and silver wire are often made. Bugle
flowers can be made in the same way, taking wire the color of the bead.

Shell baskets are very ornamental. Exquisite watch stands and cigar
or match stands can be formed of shells. Your frames should be made
of wood or tin. Cover them thick with white paint. The painters will
prepare it for you as thick as putty, with boiled oil. Paint must be
selected that will not turn yellow and will dry quickly. After covering
your frame thickly with this preparation, lay on the shells in whatever
form your own taste may direct. Place them so thick that none of the
paint will be visible, and set the frame aside until it is dry. The
drying may require several days. When it is dry varnish it with white
map varnish.

[Illustration: WATCH-STAND.]

Watch stands, in the form of a church or other building, may be made
with a tin frame. Rolls of tin may be used for columns and towers, and
soldered to the frame. A circular opening must be made in the frame
through which the watch can be seen, and a small case of tin must be
soldered to the back of the frame in which the watch can be held
firmly. Take two blocks of wood similar in form, but one of them larger
than the other, and glue the smaller one on top of the other; then make
a slit along the middle line of the upper block, in which the tin frame
is to be inserted and fastened with glue. The blocks will represent the
steps to the building, and may be covered with shells. If the building
represents a church, a cross for the top may be made of tiny rice
shells. The towers should be covered with larger sized rice shells, and
on the summit of each a small cone shell should be placed. The opening
for the watch should be surrounded by flat, round, white shells. The
inside of the case for the watch should be lined with crimson velvet,
glued in. The outside should be covered with shells.

Harps, guitars, etc., etc., can be ornamented in the same way. If they
are riveted into marble slabs, the trouble of covering the stands with
shells will be avoided. Cigar stands can be made of thick card-board,
but tin is better; it must be cut about seven and a half inches long
and four inches wide, and soldered together, (to make a round cup)
and fastened upon a stand. Boxes, tables, vases, and all kinds of
ornamental articles can be covered with shells.


ALLSPICE BASKETS.

THE allspice berries should be soaked in spirit to soften them, and
then holes should be made through them. They are strung on slender
wires, which are twisted or woven into diamonds or squares, or rows as
you fancy, and then formed into baskets. A gold band between every two
berries gives a lively look to the basket. Around the top are sometimes
twisted semi-circles of berries, from which are suspended festoons of
berries strung on silk, drooping over the outside.

The baskets may be lined with bright colored silk and ornamented with
ribbons. Baskets can be made of cloves in the same way, by taking off
the berry and soaking the long part in spirit. Bead baskets are also
made in the same way; the wire should be the color of the bead. Cut
glass beads are the most desirable, as they glitter prettily amidst the
green boughs of the Christmas tree.


RICE OR SHELL BASKETS.

THE frame is made of pasteboard neatly lined; the groundwork can be
white or colored, as you fancy; fasten on with gum either grains of
rice, bugles of different colors, or small rice shells, arranged in any
form you please.


WAFER BASKETS.

MAKE a neat card-board frame and bind the edges with gilt paper. Take
the smallest wafers you can get; keep a whole one for the ground work;
cut another in halves; wet the edges of one of the halves and stick it
upright through the middle of the whole one; cut the other half into
two quarters, wet the two straight sides, and place them on each side
of the half wafer; this forms a kind of rosette. When you have enough
prepared, wet the bottoms of the whole wafers, and fasten them on the
basket in such forms as you please. It is very pretty to have the
whole wafer one color and the rosette another. Stars can be made by
placing six quarter wafers around the half in place of two. The handle
can be decorated in the same manner, or with ribbons. Care must be
taken to have the wafers cut even and uniform.


IMPRESSIONS OF BUTTERFLIES.

IF you find a dead butterfly, cut off the wings and place them upon
clean paper, in the position they occupy when the insect is flying.
Spread some clean, thick gum water on another piece of paper and press
it on the wings; the little colored, feathery substance will adhere to
it; then lay a piece of white paper upon the top of the gummed paper,
and rub it gently with your finger, or the smooth handle of a knife. A
perfect impression of the wings will thus be taken. The body must be
drawn and painted in the space between the wings.


TO TAKE IMPRESSIONS OF LEAVES.

DIP a piece of white paper in sweet oil, and hold it over the lamp
until it is thoroughly blackened with smoke; place a green leaf upon
the black surface, and let it remain pressed upon it for a few moments;
then put it between two pieces of white paper and press it in a book,
with something heavy upon the top of it. When taken out, one of the
papers will have received a perfect impression of the leaf with all its
little veins. Some think the impression is more distinct if a little
lamp-black and oil be passed lightly over the leaf with a hair pencil,
instead of smoking it over a lamp.


PAPER LANDSCAPES.

OBSERVE well the shadows of the pictures you wish to copy; draw their
shapes as exactly as you can, and cut them out. Paste these pieces on
a sheet of paper, in the same relative positions they occupy in the
landscape; if the shade be rather light, put on only one thickness of
paper; if darker, two thicknesses and three thicknesses may be used;
if the shadow is very deep and heavy, five or six pieces may be pasted
on, one above another. When held up to the light, shades are produced
differing in degree according to the thickness of the paper. These
make very pretty transparencies for lamps in Summer. Lamp shades can
be made in this way with colored paper placed between two thin white
papers and so arranged that the shadows will represent grapes, or any
fruit or flower. China lamp shades are prepared in the same way, that
is, portions of the china are made thicker than others; in the daylight
they appear perfectly white, but when the light shines through them
the shades look like a soft landscape in India ink. It is on the same
principle that the beautiful Parian transparencies are made for windows.

[Illustration]




Natural Magic.


THE ÆOLIAN HARP consists of an oblong box of thin deal board about
five or six inches deep, with a circle drawn in the middle of the
upper side, an inch and a half in diameter, around which are to be
drilled small holes. Along the upper side of the box seven, ten or
more small strings of very fine gut are stretched over bridges near
each end, like the bridges of a violin, and tightened or relaxed with
screw pins. The strings must be tuned to one and the same note, and
the instrument placed in some current of air where the wind can pass
over its strings with freedom. A window, the width of which is exactly
equal to the length of the harp, with the sash just raised to give
the air admission, is a good situation. When the wind blows upon the
strings, with various degrees of force, different musical tones will be
sounded; sometimes the blast brings out all the tones in full concert,
and sometimes it sinks them to the softest murmur. In many old castles
these harps were fastened in the windows, and their wild music caused
the ignorant to think they were haunted.

A colossal imitation of the instrument just described was invented
at Milan, in 1786, by Abbate Gattoni. He stretched seven strong iron
wires, tuned to the notes of the gamut, from the top of a tower sixty
feet high, to the house of a Signor Muscate, who was interested in the
success of the experiment; and this apparatus, called the giant’s harp,
in blowing weather yielded lengthened peals of harmonious music. In a
storm this music was sometimes heard at the distance of several miles.

Simply tying waxed saddler’s silk to little sticks, and pushing them
into the crevices of windows, so as to receive a draft of wind (the
silk being strained tight), will produce very sweet sounds.


THE MAGIC OF ACOUSTICS.

THE science of Acoustics furnished the ancient sorcerers with some
of their most complete deceptions. The imitation of thunder in
their subterranean temples did not fail to indicate the presence of
a supernatural agent. The golden virgins, whose ravishing voices
resounded through the temple of Delphos; the stone from the river
Pactoles, where trumpet notes scared the robber from the treasure which
it guarded; the speaking head, which uttered its oracular responses at
Lesbos; and the vocal statue of Memnon, which began at the break of day
to accost the rising sun, were all deceptions derived from science, and
from a diligent observation of the phenomena of nature.


TO SHOW HOW SOUND TRAVELS THROUGH A SOLID.

TAKE a long piece of wood, such as the handle of a broom, place a
watch at one end, apply your ear to the other, and the ticking will be
distinctly heard.


A SINGULAR EXAMPLE OF SUPERSTITION.

THE following _true story_ was related to me by one who was personally
acquainted with the facts. There was a certain bend in one of our
western rivers which was avoided by every one, as it was supposed to
be haunted by the devil. At a certain hour in the evening, for many
years, terrible curses were distinctly heard. Suddenly they ceased. A
gentleman skilled in the science of acoustics, hearing an account of
the strange phenomena, determined to ascertain the cause, and carefully
examined the river on each side for about a mile above and below the
bend. He ascertained that at about the time the sounds ceased, an old
fisherman, who had lived on the opposite side of the river, full a mile
from the spot where the curses were heard, had died. He was told that
the fisherman was in the habit of crossing the river to a village,
where he found a market for his fish, and where he spent his money for
liquor, and that after drinking freely on his way home, while rowing
across the river at night, he would swear terribly. This gentleman
then persuaded a friend to go down the river to the place where the
curses were formerly heard, while he remained in a boat on the river
at the point at which the old man usually crossed. He then played on a
bugle and sung several songs. His friend soon returned, and with eager
delight exclaimed: “Oh, ——, such glorious music fills the air just
where the curses used to be heard.” The neighbors came rushing down to
hear it, and some fell on their knees praying; they said “the angels
have driven the devil away.” Mr. —— then asked what were the songs
they heard. His friend described them correctly, and said he understood
even the words, one of them being the famous Marseillaise, another a
German song; the foreign words made the ignorant more sure that the
sounds were supernatural. Mr. —— then played on the bugle and sang
again the same songs, while his friend stood by; but his friend said
the music was not equal to that he had heard below, where the sounds
had really seemed heavenly.

The peculiar configuration of the river banks had concentrated the
sounds, and the distance and the water had softened them.

The person who related this anecdote to me said that he and his friend
had often tried the experiment. Nothing would convince the more
ignorant neighbors that the sounds were occasioned by merely natural
causes. A love of the supernatural is strong within us, and sometimes
leads us into grave mistakes.


THEORY OF THE VOICE.

PROVIDE a species of whistle common as a child’s toy, or a sportsman’s
call, in the form of a hollow cylinder, about three-fourths of an inch
in diameter, closed at both ends, by flat circular plates with holes
in their centres. Hold this toy between the teeth and the lips; blow
through it, and you can produce sounds, varying in pitch with the force
with which you blow. If the air be cautiously graduated, all the sounds
within the compass of a double octave may be produced from it; and, if
great precaution be taken in the management of the breath, even deeper
tones may be brought out. This simple instrument, or toy, has indeed
the greatest resemblance to the larynx, which is the organ of the
voice.


THE VISIBLY GROWING ACORN.

CUT a circular piece of card to fit the top of a hyacinth glass, so as
to rest upon the ledge, and exclude the air. Pierce a hole through the
centre of the card, and pass through it a strong thread, having a small
piece of wood tied to one end, which, resting transversely on the card,
is prevented from being drawn through. To the other end of the thread
attach an acorn; and having half filled the glass with water, suspend
the acorn at a short distance from the surface. The glass must be kept
in a warm room; and in a few days the steam which has generated in the
glass will hang from the acorn in a large drop. Shortly afterwards the
acorn will burst, the root will protrude and thrust itself into the
water; and in a few days more a stem will shoot out at the other end,
and rising upwards, will press against the card, in which an orifice
must be made to allow it to pass through. From this stem small leaves
will soon begin to sprout; and in the course of a few weeks you will
have a handsome oak plant, several inches in height.

[Illustration]




Dancing.


DANCING is the most agreeable of all indoor pastimes that combine
pleasure with healthful exercise. It also gives grace and elasticity to
the movements. The modern gymnasium has many of the attractions of our
dancing schools, but its exercises are often too violent for delicate
children. The dancing school has proved physically beneficial to many
who have been sent to it as an experiment, at an early age. Such
exercise invigorates the frame and does more for permanent health than
can be accomplished by medicine. Exercise, to be beneficial, must have
some pleasant excitement connected with it.

It is a pleasant sight to see a home circle, old and young, joining
in a lively quadrille, or an old fashioned contra dance, in the early
evening hour, either the mother or a daughter presiding at the piano.
How joyously even children of three and four years old make their tiny
feet move in time to merry music. “Pop goes the Weasel” is a dance only
suited to little children, and they are apt scholars and can all join
in singing the popular tune. It may be well to give the directions for
this and a few other dances.


POP GOES THE WEASEL.

THIS is an old English dance revived. The positions first taken are the
same as in the contra dance, the ladies and gentlemen being placed in
lines opposite to each other. The couple at the top begin the figures.
They first dance down outside the lines and back, then join hands and
down the middle, then join hands with the lady of the couple next
to them and the three dance around in a circle till the music comes
to “Pop goes the Weasel.” As they sing that, the second lady passes
quickly under the joined hands of the couple dancing, and goes to her
place; the same couple then join hands with the gentleman opposite, and
at the proper time he pops under their joined hands in like manner;
then down outside, back again and join hands and down the middle; then
take the next lady and dance around as before. So on through the whole
line. As soon as the top couple have danced down twice, the next couple
begins. If there are long lines, there is often a number of couples
dancing together, and when all sing in time the dance is very pretty.


LANCERS.

THIS, also, is a very old English dance. There are innumerable changes,
but those given here are the most popular.

First Change.

[Illustration]

First lady and opposite gentleman forward and back; same couple forward
a second time, turn with right hand, and return to places. First
and second couple cross over, first couple joining hands and passing
between the second couple, and return to places, the second couple
joining hands and passing between the first. Balance at the corners,
the four ladies to the gentlemen on the right, gentlemen facing the
left, to return the balance. Turn partners with both hands to places.
Same for the other three couples.

Second Change.

First couple forward and back. Forward a second time and leave lady in
front of opposite couple facing her partner, gentleman returning to
place. The same couple chassez to right and left, and turn to places
with both hands. All eight forward and back in two lines; forward and
turn partners to places. In forming two lines first and second times,
the side couples separate from their partners, and join each side of
the head couples, forming two lines, four on a side; third and fourth
times the head couples join the sides.

Third Change.

First gentleman and opposite lady forward and back. Forward a second
time and salute with a low bow and low graceful courtesy and return
to places. The four ladies then form a windmill by giving their right
hands, while the four gentlemen take their left hands, with their left
hands, all facing the same direction, and promenade entirely around,
and turn partners to places.

Ladies grand chain is danced in Paris in place of the windmill. The
three other couples dance the same.

Fourth Change.

First couple visit the couple on the right hand, salute with bow and
courtesy. Visit the couple on the left and salute, then change across
and salute same couple again. First couple return to place. Right and
left with opposite couples. The other three couples dance the same. In
Paris they dance it double, first and second couples at the same time,
and so on.

Fifth Change.

Grand right and left. First couple turn and face outward. Then couple
on the right take their place behind the first, then the couple on
the left, the second couple behind all. All chassez across and back,
gentlemen passing behind ladies. Promenade outside, ladies to the left.
Gentlemen to right, meeting at the bottom, and coming up together. All
eight forward and back, ladies on one side, gentlemen on the other. All
forward and turn partners to places. This is danced through till each
couple has taken turn in being the leaders.


GRAND SQUARE.

[Illustration]

At the same time, the first lady and second gentleman, and the second
lady and first gentleman join hands and turn to the sides, while the
third lady and fourth gentleman and fourth lady and third gentleman
passing on the outside of the first and second couples, join hands and
take the latters’ place. Then they pass on the inside and the others on
the outside, each taking his own partner to place. Then repeat, only
reversing it, by the first and second couples going on the outside
first, and the third and fourth inside.


LE PRINCE IMPERIAL QUADRILLE.

(A new change introduced by the Empress Eugenie.)

First Change.

LE CHAINE CONTINUE DES DAMES.

HEAD couples to sides. First and second couples lead to right hand
couples, and all salute, (viz: first couple to third, second to
fourth.) First and second gentlemen retaining partner’s hand, take with
their left hands, the left hands of the side ladies. The two threes
thus promenade to places of head couples, second to first couples’
place, first to second couples’ place, all facing the centre. Ladies
grand chain; the four ladies, without the gentlemen, make a movement
like the grand chain of the “Lancers,” by crossing over from head to
head of sets, giving right hands; passing from side to side, giving
left hands; again back from head to head of set, giving right hands,
and across again to side, giving left hands, ending with each lady in
front of her partner, lady facing outward. All chassez to right and
left and turn partners. By repeating this figure the first and second
couples return to places, after which the side couples dance the figure
twice through.

Second Change.

LA NOUVELLE TRENIS.

First gentleman and second lady forward, and turn with both hands,
both stopping in front and facing the lady who was left in her place.
Cross over; the single lady passes between this couple and crosses
to opposite gentleman, giving him her left hand, (that gentleman
giving his left hand also,) and turn to lady’s place on right of that
gentleman; at the same time the other two cross over to first couple’s
place, and turn with left hands and face opposite couple. Forward four
and back; half ladies’ chain, (the ladies thus return to partners.) All
eight chassez across and turn at corners. All chassez back and turn
partners.

Third Change.

LA CORBEILLE.

First gentleman leaves lady in the center, (the lady facing outward,)
separating with salute. Second gentleman the same; third gentleman the
same; fourth the same. Ladies hands around; the four ladies thus back
to back take hands and round to right, stopping in front of partners.
Gentlemen forward. The four gentlemen advance and give right hands to
partners and left hands to next lady, and make a large circle. All
balance in circle and turn partners to place.

Fourth Change.

LA DOUBLE PASTOURELLE.

Forward four. First and second couples forward and back; leave partners
on sides; first gentleman leaves his lady on left of third gentleman,
and returns to place; at the same time the second lady leaves her
gentleman on right of fourth lady, and retires to place; forward
six; the six on sides forward and back twice; two forward; the first
gentleman and second lady forward and back. Forward again, salute, and
pass to side where partners are. Four hands half around, with sides.
Right and left to places.

Fifth Change.

LA TOURBILLON

Ladies to right. The four ladies pass to the gentleman next on their
right, and turn with him, both giving right hands. They pass again to
the right, and turn with next gentleman, (with same hands.) They pass
again and turn, finally pass again to the right, which brings all to
partners. First couple forward and back. Turn with right hands ending
in centre, face to face. All four to right and left. Turn to places.

After the ladies repeat the first sixteen bars of this figure a fifth
time, all the gentlemen place their partners in the centre, facing
outward, each lady thus facing her own partner. Then the quadrille thus
terminates by all saluting.


COMMON COTILLION.

First Change.

FIRST and second couples right and left. The same couples balance.
Ladies chain. Same half promenade, half right and left back.

Second Change.

Forward two, first lady and second gentleman then cross over, chassez
and return to places. Balance. Each couple the same.

Third Change.

Right hand across, first and second couples cross over giving right
hands to opposites as they pass. Left hands back, which are retained,
giving right hands to partners, thus forming a circle in the middle of
the set. Balance in a circle, then cross to opposite sides; chassez.
Two ladies forward and back; two gentlemen the same; four forward and
back; right and left to places. Head couples repeat, then the sides the
same.

Fourth Change.

Forward four and back; forward a second time, first gentleman leaving
first lady on the left of opposite gentleman; three forward twice,
second time first gentleman handing both ladies to opposite gentleman;
three forward twice on opposite side, the second time stop in the
centre; four hands half around to the right and cross over. Right and
left to places. Head couples repeat, then the sides go through the same
figure.

Fifth Change.

JIG DANCE.

Hands all around. All the ladies balance to and turn gentlemen on the
right, pass to the next, balance, &c.; so on all around. Hands all
around, or promenade all. Gentlemen then pass to the right, the same as
the ladies. All promenade or hands all around.


BASKET DANCE.

FORWARD two; balance; ladies’ hands around in centre; left to right;
gentlemen join hands outside the ladies and pass around, stopping on
the left of partners; gentlemen pass their joined hands over the heads
of ladies, (ladies standing still,) and form the basket; all balance
and turn partners.


WHITE COCKADE.

FIRST couple balance to right; four hands around; first couple balance
to left; four hands around; hands all around. This is repeated by the
other couples.


THE WALTZ AND POLKA QUADRILLE.

THE changes in these quadrilles are the same as in the common
cotillion, except that a waltz or polka is played, and all the changes
are danced either with the waltz or polka step, and at the end of each
change, all waltz or polka around.


SIR ROGER DE COVERLEY, OR VIRGINIA REEL.

DANCED with eight couples or more in two lines, the ladies on one side,
gentlemen on the other, facing each other. The top lady and bottom
gentleman execute each figure, and are immediately followed by the
bottom lady and top gentleman, in the following order: forward and
back; forward and turn with the right hand and back to places; turn
with the left and back; then with both hands and back, forward and dos
a dos and back; forward and back; (this is often danced by the two
top ladies, and two bottom gentlemen, at once; it is prettier than
in couples.) The lady then turns with the left hand, every gentleman
down the line, while her partner turns every lady, turning his partner
alternately with the right hand. When arrived at the bottom, chassez
back to the head, separate from partner, lady passing down the line
outside of the ladies, and the gentleman outside the gentlemen, all in
each line following, meeting partners at the bottom and then chassez up
the centre, when first couple chassez down the middle and take their
positions below the last couple. The figure is continued by the new
couple at the head, and so on, till all have danced the whole figure.


THE NINE-PIN DANCE.

EIGHT must form a cotillion; the ninth must stand at the side and call
any changes he pleases, and lastly call grand right and left. When he
claps his hands, they must all promenade. The one calling must then, if
possible, secure a partner. If the attempt is successful, the one left
out must call the changes of the dance; and so on.


CALEDONIAN QUADRILLES.

First Change.

FIRST and second couples cross right hands, left hands back; balance,
and turn partners; ladies’ chain; half promenade and half right and
left to places. Repeat twice.

Second Change.

Gentlemen forward and back twice; all balance to corners and turn each
lady, passing into the next lady’s place; all promenade. This figure to
be repeated four times.

Third Change.

First lady and opposite gentleman forward and back twice; first couples
pass between opposite couples in crossing over, and return outside;
balance to corners, and turn to places; all join hands in a circle and
forward and back twice. Repeat four times.

Fourth Change.

First lady and opposite gentleman forward and stop; partners the same;
turn partners to their places; four ladies change places to the right;
gentlemen change places to the left; ladies change places again to the
right; gentlemen change again to the left; all around to their places,
and turn partners. Repeat four times.

Fifth Change.

First couple promenade around inside; ladies all forward to centre;
give right hands and back to places; gentleman the same; balance to
partners and turn; grand right and left half round; promenade to places
and turn partners; all chassez across, giving right hands at corners
and back to places. Repeat four times; then all promenade.

[Illustration]




Dramatic Amusements.


PRIVATE theatricals and dramatic or Shakspeare reading clubs are among
the fashionable amusements of the present day. Many, I know, disapprove
of them; but I think they do far more good than harm. They certainly
strengthen the lungs, memory, and improve the intellectual tastes.
But I will not discuss the subject, as far abler pens than mine have
already argued on both sides of the question. Private theatricals
amuse a large circle of friends, and any club willing to undertake the
presentation of plays deserves the thanks of the audience.

Even a simple farce requires much labor and frequent rehearsals, to be
well acted, and one soon wearies of the constant repetition of even
witty sayings. The most trivial character must be carefully studied,
for one bad actor often destroys the effect of the whole play. Then
the foot-lights, stage, &c., must be prepared. A few directions, with
a list of easy farces may be of service. All who live in cities can
easily hire scenery, dresses, &c., but for the benefit of towns and
villages, I will give a short account of how such things can be managed.

Some lady can almost always be found who will give the use of her
house. A house should be selected which has two parlors, connected by
large folding doors, or an arch; one parlor being for the audience, and
the other for the stage. All the furniture and carpets should be taken
from the latter room. A rough staging should be built (boards can be
easily hired), and by boring a hole in the floor a gas-pipe can be run
up along the front of the staging, with a sufficient number of burners.
Tin shades painted green (as they render the light softer, and more
agreeable to the eye) are an addition, for they keep the light from
the audience, and throw it directly on the actors. A large floor cloth
can be nailed on the stage for a carpet. A drop curtain, so arranged
as to be rolled up quickly and easily, by means of a cord pulley at
one side of the stage, where the prompter sits, just out of sight of
the audience, is necessary. Scenery for the sides and back parts of
the stage can be roughly painted on cloth; it answers every purpose of
canvass by being strained when wet over light wooden frames (made so as
to be easily moved); when dry, it presents a smooth, hard surface.

Each member should provide his or her own dress. To give the required
expressions to the faces, a box of good water colors, some fine chalk
powder, camel’s hair pencils, and rouge saucers, are wanted. To make
frowns, scowls, or comical expressions, such as a broad grin, smirk, or
simper, stand before a mirror and assume the desired expression; then
trace the wrinkles produced, with a fine brush of the brown tint; this
will fix the required expression on your face. Rouge is best applied
with the finger. Burnt cork is excellent for darkening eyebrows, and
making moustaches, also for representing leanness, which will be done
by applying a faint tint just under the eyes, on the sides of the
cheeks, and under the lower lip. A strong mark running from the corner
of the nose down towards the corner of the mouth on each side, marks
age or emaciation.

A few directions may be of use in regard to the preparation of
theatrical dresses. Powdered wigs can be made of tow, raveled yarn, or
gray colored horse hair; beards and moustache of the same, or a piece
of buffalo skin. Ermine can be made of cotton flannel with tags of
lion skin cloth sewed on, or black tags painted. Pelisse wadding is
sometimes used.

Crowns and sceptres are easily made of pasteboard and gold paper.
Velvet talma cloaks, capes, or even the loose velvet sack, can be
converted into cavalier cloaks (the arm-holes in the sack must be
fastened up on the inside), by fastening them gracefully over one
shoulder. Then put on a large old-fashioned lace collar, ruffles
around the hand, a Kossuth hat, looped up on one side with a paste pin
or buckle, fastening a white or black plume, (taken from some lady’s
bonnet), stockings drawn over the pantaloons and fastened at the knees
with bows and buckles; and lo! with but little trouble, you have a fine
cavalier of the olden times. With old finery and a little ingenuity, a
theatrical wardrobe can be quickly made, if all are willing to do their
part, but the larger share of the work is generally done by a few.
Rocks can be made by throwing plain gray blanket shawls over ottomans,
tables, &c. Rain may be imitated by dropping peas in a tin pan, thunder
by rattling sheet-iron, lightning by means of a tin tube, larger at one
end than the other, and filled with powdered resin. The smaller end of
the tube should be open, the other end so managed that the resin may
sift through. Shake the tube over a lamp, or blow the resin through a
plain tube into the flame of a lamp, and you will have a good imitation
of lightning.

Dissolve crystals of nitrate of copper in spirits of wine, light the
solution and it will burn with a beautiful emerald green flame. Pieces
of sponge, soaked in this spirit, lighted and suspended by fine wires
over the stage of theatres, produce the lambent green flames, now so
common in incantation scenes. Strips of flannel saturated with it, and
wrapped around pieces of copper, will form the swords and fire-forks
brandished by the demons in such scenes. Devices like the above are
very simple, and add much to the general effect.

The following is a list of plays which are easily and often acted in
private theatricals:

Comedies.

                 The Rivals.        │         London Assurance.
                 Fashion.           │         Lady of Lyons.


Farces.

   The Loan of a Lover.             │        Bombastes Furioso.
   The Widow’s Victim.              │        Lend Me Five Shillings.
   Perfection.                      │        Phantom Breakfast.
   Sketches in India.               │        Rough Diamond.
   Morning Calls.                   │        A Pretty Piece of Business.
   Swiss Cottage.                   │        Old Guard.
   My New Wife and My Old Umbrella. │        A Game of Romps.
   Kill or Cure.                    │        Betsy Baker.
   Poor Pillecody.                  │


DRAMATIC READING CLUBS.

THESE clubs are far more agreeable to their members and less likely
to cause unpleasant rivalries, which, it is to be regretted, are apt
to arise among even private actors. Human nature, alas, is weak! Some
clubs read Shakspeare alone. It is most certainly a noble study, and
one we can never weary of. Few can hope ever to excel in delineating
Shakspeare. Therefore it is well, if we meet together for social
enjoyment as well as improvement, to have a variety of plays. I have
known of very successful clubs, and I will give the general manner of
proceeding adopted by one of them, as it may assist in the formation of
others. The club was started by some young ladies with a view of making
home and winter evenings agreeable to their brothers; a committee was
chosen to form a code of laws. Each one was to subscribe a small sum
to purchase the “librettos” of their plays. The following rules were
signed by all the members:

1. Each member of the club must take his or her turn in choosing a
play, and in giving out the rôle of characters.

2. Every member must take the characters given him, and do his best,
unless he can exchange parts with some other member, with the consent
of the one who selected the play.

3. The one who selects the play has a right to the best character.

4. The club shall meet once a week at the houses of members, in
alphabetical rotation.

5. Whenever any member is unable to take his part and cannot attend the
meeting, he must provide some one to take his character.

6. No new member can be admitted without the vote of the majority.

7. Each member must study his or her part well, before meeting with the
club. If any two, or several, should have difficult parts together,
they must meet privately and practise them.

At first, they merely read the plays; but soon, they partially acted
them, and found them increased in interest thereby. They always had
their little librettos by them. Those who had ready memories rarely
referred to them; or a mere glance would be sufficient. Finally they
dressed in character, and admitted an audience composed of their
relatives.

There is not necessarily anything awkward in having the books in hand.
Such little pamphlets can be easily rolled up, and will scarcely be
noticed. Under these rules they became familiar with the best plays,
without wearying of them; and each member had an opportunity of
consulting his own taste.

I sincerely recommend this as an amusement. Persons who read French and
German will find this an admirable way of learning to converse with
ease in either of those languages.

Sheridan Knowles’ plays and Shakspeare are among the best to select
from. “Love’s Sacrifice,” “Ion,” “Hunchback,” and “William Tell,” are
excellent plays to be read in this way.


CHARADES.

THERE is no game that can afford so much amusement to a circle of
friends as that of acting charades. It affords a scope for the exercise
of both wit and ingenuity.

A word must be chosen, in which the syllables may be rendered into some
kind of a lively performance, and the whole word must be capable of
similar representation. Then the plan of action must be agreed upon.
Old-fashioned garments, gay shawls, scarfs, old coats, hats, aprons,
gowns, &c., must be looked up for the occasion, and speedily converted
into various and grotesque costumes, suited to the representation to
be made. By exercising a little ingenuity, very fine charades can be
acted “impromptu.” Speed, in all preparations, is quite necessary to
success, as an audience is always impatient. If it is determined to
have charades at a party, the lady of the house should arrange dresses,
plan of action and subjects, beforehand. She can generally tell who
can assist her best. If all the arrangements can be made without the
knowledge of her guests, the effect will be greatly increased. This is
also an improving game for a family of children. Write the plot and
a simple dialogue, and let them learn it; it will be a good exercise
for the memory, and teach them ease of manner; but let them only act
before a home circle.

A few directions for acting certain words, and a short list of words
easy to be acted may be of service to my readers. If a word or syllable
can be represented by action, it should be seldom spoken, but syllables
must be spoken in some cases to give an idea of the word:

PENITENT.—“Penny” sufficiently expresses the first division of the
word. It can be represented by dressing in old clothes, torn hats,
bonnets, &c., to appear as street hawkers, common in cities. One can
sell “Lucifer matches—penny a bunch!” another, “Apples, fine red
apples—penny apiece!” another, “Oranges, fine fresh oranges—penny
apiece!” and so on. In this way a motley group can be contrived. A
policeman, rushing in and dispersing the group, may close the scene.
“Tent” can be represented by throwing a sheet or table-cloth over two
chairs (high-backed chairs would be preferable), in the style of a
gypsy tent. In front should be grouped some gypsies, in gay shawls,
handkerchiefs, looped dresses, &c. A lady and gentleman can approach
and ask to have their fortunes told, &c. Some one of the gypsies
singing, “In the days when we went gypsying,” would close this act
well. “Penitent” can be easily represented in a variety of ways. If it
is not guessed, the charade could be repeated and acted differently.

BRIDEWELL.—“Bride” is usually represented by a wedding, which can be
arranged to suit the tastes of the parties acting, and can be either
simple or elaborate, as they may please. The common way is to have a
dress ceremony; bride in full costume, with bridesmaids, but for a
change, one might arrange a justice’s office, and have a couple come
in to be married, the bride conspicuous in white bows and ends, and
cheap finery. Let her be the chief speaker, the man appearing awkward
and shy. After the ceremony, let her drive a sharp bargain in paying
the fee. “Well:” Take a large tub and cover it with a gray shawl, so
arranged as to look like stone, and if you have any green fleecy mats,
arrange them to represent grass. A dark-complexioned gentleman, (any
one can stain his face for the occasion,) with a turban, and dressed
in shawls skillfully arranged, may represent an Eastern Emir. He
should be seen seated Turkish-fashion by the well. A lady, dressed as
Rebecca, with a crimson scarf about her waist, having her arms bare,
and a handkerchief bound around her head, should come in, holding with
one arm a pitcher on her head. Let her seem to fill her pitcher at
the well. Then Eliezer must ask her to give him drink. After she has
handed him her pitcher (which she must have placed on her head after
having appeared to fill it), he must take from his bosom a casket of
jewels, and exhibit bracelets and ear-rings. She can feign astonishment
and admiration. He must kneel at her feet and present them. She
should express surprise and delight. Then Eliezer must fasten on the
bracelets, and the scene of Eliezer and Rebecca at the _well_ will be
represented.

To act “Bridewell:” Arrange a prison cell; take screens or
clothes-frames, and hang them with gray or black shawls, and cover
the carpet. Put in a common wood table and a kitchen chair, and let a
dim-lighted lantern be the only light. Some gentleman, meanly clad,
with hair all on end; and clenched hands resting on his knees, must be
seated in the chair, with eyes bent sullenly on the ground, and with
a scowling brow. Let chains hang from his wrists and ankles, and as
he moves clank together. Acted in this way, the word would be easily
guessed.

FAREWELL.—“Fare:” A gentleman dressed as a hackman can come in, whip
in hand. Then a gentleman and lady and a child should appear, dressed
for a journey. The hackman must address them in the usual manner,
offering to take them to any place, &c. The gentleman must then ask,
“What is the _fare_?” and bargains for it, refusing to pay _fare_ for
the child, &c. “Well:” Two ladies enter with shawls and bonnets on,
and appear to meet accidentally; each asks anxiously if the other is
_well_, and if all the family are _well_, &c.

“Farewell” can be acted in various ways. A party with bandboxes and
baskets, on their way west, may be bidding _farewell_ to friends; or a
lover, going to California, may be taking leave of his lady-love, &c.

RAILWAY.—“Rail:” Take two chairs, and place a strong cane, stick or
broom, with one end resting on each chair. Then some boy or girl may
come in and jump on the stick, swing over it, and talk about “riding on
a _rail_.” An elderly lady or gentleman should come in and talk to him
about breaking his neck on the rail, &c., &c. “Way:” a gentleman with
a carpet bag in his hand may inquire the _way_ to the depot, or an old
lady may ask which is the _way_ to the menagerie, &c. “Railway:” Let
a party of people come rushing in, some limping and groaning, others
wondering where their bandboxes have gone to! all talking of the “smash
up” on the _railway_, bringing in the word in all possible ways.

CARPET.—“Car:” several persons may pass in and out dressed in
character, as a Yankee peddler, a country girl never before from home,
a man of business, a fine lady with servants, &c., all appearing to be
waiting for the _cars_, and talking about them. Suddenly let a bell
ring, and the conductor call out, “Cars start for,” etc. All then rush
forward in character. “Pet:” Let a lady come in with a cat, dog or any
_pet_ animal, fondling it as absurdly as possible, pretending it is
sick, calling for some one to go for the doctor, &c. “Carpet:” Arrange
a table as a counter. Some one must act as shopman. Let a lady enter
with a simpering air, her intended husband following, and ask to look
at _carpets_. Have in readiness under the counter several pieces of
_carpets_ or rugs, which the shopman should display, while the lady
consults the taste of her future lord, &c.

LUNATIC.—“Luna:” A gentleman, dressed as a young collegian,
enters with a young lady on his arm; they pretend to be walking by
_moon_-light. He speaks of the moon by its latin name, _Luna_, and
talks in a high-flown style. The lady may ask in a flat and awkward
style, “Who is Luna?” saying she never heard of her, &c., &c. The
young man explains, in a bombastic style, who _Luna_ is. “Tic:” A lady
represents an old woman, and goes about offering to make over old
_tics_, as good as new, and also says she has some geese feathers to
sell, carrying on of course other conversation, so that the word to
be guessed may not be too apparent. “Lunatic:” The best actor of the
company feigns the part of a _lunatic_, in any way he sees fit.

LAMENTABLE.—(French charade.) “L’amont” can be acted well in
pantomime, by representing an old deaf man, and his young wife; the
old man with spectacles on nose, sitting in a large chair, reading
the newspaper, his young wife standing behind the chair. A low tap is
heard at the door. She starts and listens; the door opens slily and
discovers a young man. She starts with delight, but points to the old
man, motioning the young man to go. He makes gestures of despair; then
appears to have a sudden thought, bows and retires. Soon a loud knock
is heard, she goes to the door, and returns with a letter, giving it
to the old man; he reads, shakes his head, and hands it to her; she
looks at it, runs for his hat and coat and motions him to go. He leaves
at one door, while _L’Aman_ enters at another. Then they act a lover
like scene and the curtain drops. “Table:” She again appears with
sleeves rolled up, apron on, rolling-pin in hand, making cakes; the
young lover standing by, and now and then eating one of the cakes. They
hear a heavy step and the lover runs for a hiding-place. At last he
springs under the table, and she pulls a table-cloth down around it,
and goes on rolling cakes. In comes the old man, hobbling along. He
looks around and suspects something, and begins a strict search. Thus
ends that scene. “Lamentable:” The same actors appear, but the table is
turned over, and behold! the old man has seized the young lover, and is
brandishing aloft a heavy cane, while the young wife appears, weeping
bitterly.

WARLOCK.—(A male wizard.) “War:” A wounded soldier is seen prostrate
and dying. “Lock:” An old woman with a long tow wig, sits mumbling to
herself, and knitting. A young man appears and pretends entire devotion
to her, and begs for a _lock_ of her hair. She refuses at first, but
he coaxes it from her. She then takes out a large pair of shears and
cuts off a long _lock_, rolls it up and gives it to him. He pretends
ecstasy, but laughs behind her back. “Warlock:” A gentleman dressed as
an old wizard, appears and offers to tell fortunes, &c.; this can be
performed as the actor thinks best.

The following words are easy to be acted:—

         Back-bite.             Bond-age.         Brace-let.
         Com-fort.              Ann-ounce.        In-firm.
         In-fan-tile.           Sin-cere.         Spec-tacles.




TABLEAUX VIVANTS.

TABLEAU vivants, as commonly represented, are so well understood
that no directions are necessary, but some of my readers may not
have heard of the illustration of poems, &c., by a series of living
pictures. This is far more interesting than simply to personify some
one picture. Still another way is to represent the different scenes
in a song, while at the same time some one who is a good musician
sings the verses of the song as they are represented. For instance,
“The Mistletoe Bough,” first represent a room decorated with green, a
company assembled gaily dressed and dancing, while a lady or gentleman
behind the scene sings the verse represented in distinct tones, and so
on through the whole song; the last scene representing children in a
lumber-room opening an old chest and exposing a skeleton, old flowers,
&c. “Auld Robin Grey,” and “The Three Fishers” are easily represented.
Still another variety of tableaux is a song represented in pantomime,
for instance, the song of “Blue Beard,” or “O, they Marched through the
Town,” &c.

[Illustration]




The Sibyl.


FORTUNE telling, as a practice, is morally wrong, and they who
intentionally deceive credulous people commit a sin; the effects of
such deception on sensitive minds are often lasting, and in some
instances have been attended with very sad results. Almost all persons
have a little superstition in their natures, and naturally relish
mystery.

But as a game and pastime, fortune telling is harmless and amusing.
The old fashioned fate lady has afforded much amusement and profit at
fairs. The following is a more modern and graceful method: Cut green
enameled paper in the shape of oak leaves, and on the white side
write some simple oracle. The person who represents the sibyl seats
herself, dressed in character, under a tasteful canopy, with a table
in front, and her sibylline leaves scattered over it, with the green
side upwards. Then as individuals enquire their fate of the oracle, let
her move about the leaves, muttering some incantation, and let each
one select his or her own leaf. Another way is to hold the leaves in a
cornucopia and scatter them around from it. Care must be taken not to
expose the white side of the leaves.


THE FIAT OF FATE.

[Illustration]

MAKE twelve flat pin-cushions, heart-shape, and all of different
colors, such as blue, variegated, white, scarlet, green, lilac,
checkered, brown, slate, purple, yellow and pink. Have a loop of narrow
ribbon fastened to each, and stick small pins all around them as in the
design. Take some narrow ribbon and string them all upon it; they are
then ready to be used, with the following oracles:

The Fiat of Fate.

  To all who wish their fate to know,
  These hearts will future fortunes show;
  With shaded eyes then touch and name—
  The _color_ will thy lot proclaim.

BLUE.

  If fortune favors thee, wish blue,
  Thou couldst not wish a brighter hue;
  On life’s dark disc this shade portrays
  Truth, happiness, and length of days.

VARIEGATED.

  These variegated colors show
  A pleasing mixture here below,
  To those whose lot it is to name,
  This emblem, of both joy and pain.

WHITE.

  This lovely white then touch with joy,
  And gain a fate without alloy;
  Fair, pure and spotless is the life
  Thus singled out from future strife.

SCARLET.

  With caution this gay color name,
  For wide and evil is its fame;
  Inflammatory, it taints the air,
  Portending strife and civil war.

GREEN.

  This cool, inviting, lovely green,
  Has to the single ever been
  An emblem of their future state,
  Their peaceful, though forsaken, fate.

LILAC.

  The lilac tint betokens life
  Of every hope, and plans are rife;
  Of love and friendship, holy, true,
  The pink is tempered by the blue.

CHECKERED.

  The many colors here portrayed,
  Of every hue, and every shade,
  Portends a checkered changing lot,
  From palace to the humble cot.

BROWN.

  This sombre brown denotes a calm
  And pleasing life, devoid of harm;
  An innocent and simple mind,
  A temper meek and well inclined.

SLATE.

  This pale and melancholy shade
  Betokens ills that never fade;
  But prey upon the tainted power,
  Embittering each succeeding hour.

PURPLE.

  This royal color, rich in pride,
  A splendid fate may well betide;
  Exalted rank and riches great,
  Vanity, power, pomp and state.

YELLOW.

  Beware of yellow, ’tis a color
  Speaks of misery, grief and dolor;
  Of jealousy, and broken vows,
  And many nameless, endless woes.

PINK.

  A life of innocence and mirth
  Will be thy portion here on earth;
  With reason, then, you may rejoice,
  The modest pink has been your choice.


FLOWER FATE.

PROCURE a quantity of cards, each with a separate flower painted
upon it. In a book write the meaning of each flower, and then let a
person choose any number of cards. You must look out the meaning of
each, and ingeniously combine the whole into one sentence. A more
beautiful design for a fair or a social party is the arrangement of
natural flowers in small fate bouquets, some one person arranging their
accompanying oracles beforehand. Then let the person seeking to know
his fate select a bouquet.


FATE BOX.

WRITE a number of fates and fill a box, made with an opening just large
enough to admit the hand. Then, as the person seeks his fortune, shake
up the box, and let him draw out his fate.

[Illustration]




The Puzzler.


THE following conundrums, riddles, etc., are given merely as
suggestions. The conundrums most productive of amusement are those made
in the course of general conversation. A happy party, in the course of
a long and stormy evening, may make more and better ones than are to be
found in any one book. If those given here attract the attention and
excite the ingenuity of the boys and girls who read them, a great deal
of home pleasure will be the result.


CONUNDRUMS.

1. IF a man’s son had told a lie, and he wished to order him, in the
shortest way possible, to leave him, what Scripture name would he use?

2. What relation would a man be to a person he visited in jail, if, on
being asked, he said, “Brothers and sisters have I none, yet this man’s
father is my father’s son?”

3. Why had the children of Israel plenty of food in the desert?

4. Why were there plenty of sandwiches in the desert?

5. Why is a short negro like a white man?

6. Why do we all go to bed?

7. Why is a room full of married people like an empty room?

8. Why is an angry person like a hard baked loaf of bread?

9. When is a door not a door?

10. Why is a man in love like a lobster?

11. Why is an avaricious man like one with a short memory?

12. Why is a pair of pantaloons too big every way like two populous
towns in France?

13. You are requested to ask the following question in three letters:
“Are you the person?”

14. What sea would make the best bedroom?

15. Which are ladies most in favor of, tall or short men?

16. Why is a speech, delivered on the deck of a man-of-war, like a
lady’s necklace?

17. Why is the letter D like a sailor?

18. Why is grass like a mouse?

19. Why is a bald head like heaven?

20. What two letters make a County in Massachusetts?

21. Why is an angry man like a lady in full dress?

22. Why is a good wife like the evil one?

23. Why is a good story like a parish bell?

24. Why were the brokers of 1857 like Pharaoh’s daughter?

25. Why is there but little difference between a light in a cavern and
a dance in the hall of a tavern?

26. By what three Bible names would a mother call her three sons, in
telling them to go home with some young ladies in a carriage? The first
she spoke to in an enquiring tone; the second, entreating; the third,
commanding?

27. Who was the fastest woman in the Bible?

28. How did Adam and Eve leave Paradise?

29. Why was not Noah a good mouser?

30. Why are camel’s hair shawls in this country like a stone deaf
person?

31. In what way would you ask a Doctor of Divinity to play on a violin,
in the shortest possible way?

32. Why is an odd walker easiest recognized at his own door?

33. Why is the gray hair of a person who has had many trials like a
plated spoon?

34. Why is a sword like lager beer?


ENIGMAS, CHARADES AND RIDDLES.

  1.  My first is a common London cry,
      My next an insect; now try
      To guess my whole; a clue I’ll give, though slight,
      It oft emits my first, a glorious sight.

  2.  We are twin brothers, and in vain,
      We never meet but to complain.

  3.  My first implies to be able,
      My second is a Christian name which may be read both ways,
      My whole is in North America.

  4.  My first may be seen, and my second be heard;
      My whole is the name of a sweet-singing bird.

  5.  By me men often upward go,
      Behead—a reptile it will show.

  6.  A word of four letters I pray you to take;
      If that word you follow, ’twill sure make you ache;
      Just alter that word, and squeeze out one letter;
      Then follow that word, and ’twill soon make you better.

   7. My first in every shop is seen,
      My next affords us light;
      My total you will see, I ween,
      When you’ve bade friends good-night.

   8. My first sounds much like something true,
        My second sounds much like a lie;
      But what is spoken like my whole,
        Let no one venture to deny.

   9. To a word of consent add one half of a fright,
      Next subjoin what you never behold in the night;
      These rightly connected, you’ll quickly obtain
      What millions have seen, but will ne’er see again.

  10. Found long ago, yet made to-day,
        Employed while others sleep;
      What few would wish to give away,
        And none would wish to keep.

  11. Two hundred men and women sitting,
      Talking, reading, sleeping, knitting;
      Boston, Lynn, Salem, Andover,
      In, out, under, over;
      Tugging, hugging, dreaming, screaming,
      Rain, or snow, or sunshine beaming;
      Buzz and stir, smoke and hissing,
      Often ends with hearty kissing.

  12. My first is to hard-working horses oft spoken;
      My second, of sudden surprise is a token;
      My third is a place we shall do well to shun;
      My fourth is a river, which in Scotland doth run;
      My half is an order to quit, you will find;
      My whole is an idol set up by mankind.

  13. In every hedge my second is,
        As well as every tree;
      And when poor school-boys act amiss,
        It often is their fee.
      My first, likewise, is always wicked,
        Yet ne’er committed sin;
      My total for my first is fitted,
        Composed of brass or tin.

  14. My first is a part of the day,
        My second at feasts overflows;
      In the cottage my whole is oft seen,
        To measure old Time as he goes.

  15. If you a musical instrument behead,
      A sweeter-toned one will remain behind.

  16. A shining wit pronounced of late
      That every acting magistrate
      Is water, in a freezing state.

  17. In spring, I am gay in my attire;
      In summer, I wear more clothing than in spring;
      In winter, I am naked.

  18. A word of three syllables, seek till you find,
      That has in it the twenty-six letters combined.

19. A lady in prison received an animal, as a present from her niece,
which signified to her, “Make your escape.” In reply, she sent back
a fruit, which imported, “It is impossible to escape.” What was the
animal? and what was the fruit?

20. In Sir Walter Scott’s celebrated poem, “Marmion,” are the following
lines:—

  “Charge, Chester! charge! On, Stanley, on!
  Were the last words of Marmion.”

These lines suggested the following enigma:—

  Were I in noble Stanley’s place,
  When Marmion urged him to the charge;
  The word you then might all descry
  Would bring a tear to every eye.

  21. Round the house—in the corners,
      Down the stairs—behind the door!

  22.  I’m reckoned only fifty, but for centuries have been,
  In every age, in every clime, among the living seen;
  Mute, though incessantly in talk, I give to silence sound;
  And single ’tis my fate to be, whilst fast in wedlock bound.
  The learned place me at their head, tho’ oft unknown to fame,
  And eloquence itself delights to sound abroad my name;
  Though plunged in guilt, the tenant of a prison’s gloomy cell,
  Yet, twice invoked, my potent aid concludes the wizard’s spell.
  I ride upon the whirlwind—point the lightning thro’ the storm;
  And mine the power, with but a word, another world to form;
  I, too, alone, can kindle fame, and, what is very odd,
  The veriest miser can prevent from making gold his god.
  I usher in the morning, yet shun the face of day;
  A stranger to the voice of mirth, yet join in every play.
  The fabled liquid I, with which poor Tantalus was cursed;
  For, in the proffered goblet seen, I mock the wretch’s thirst.
  The rich secure me for their wealth, the cunning for their wiles;
  And, ’reft of me, ah! changed how soon were beauty’s sweetest smiles!
  I lurk within the brilliant glance that flashes from her eye,
  Rest on her ruby lip, and in her laughing dimples lie;
  I breathe the first soft sound of love, in the maiden’s willing ear,
  And mingle in the rising blush that tells that love is dear;
  I lead the laugh, I swell the glee amid the festal hall,
  But a truant from the banquet, and a laggard in the ball.
  First in the martial lists I ride, with mail, and lance and shield;
  And, foremost of the line, I charge upon the battle-field.
  And yet, though ranked among the bold, I scarcely join the fight;
  When, foul disgrace to manhood’s race, I turn at once to flight.
  From greatness thus removed, I make acquaintanceship with evil;
  And, (in your ear a word) maintain alliance with the devil!

  23. We are little airy creatures,
      All of different voice and natures;
      One of us in glass is set,
      One of us you’ll find in jet;
      The other you may see in tin,
      And the fourth a box within;
      If the fifth you should pursue,
      It can never fly from you.

  24. My parent bred me to the sea,
      I’ve been where never man could be;
      Long time I’ve ranged the ocean wide,
      And all the rage of storms defied;
      The lowering clouds obscured the sky,
      And foaming billows mounted high;
      Tho’ winds with almost fury blew,
      And thunders roll’d, and lightnings flew;
      Waves, winds and thunders all in vain
      Opposed my passage thro’ the main.
      At length, my parent died, and I
      On shore would fain my fortune try;
      I left the sea, grew fond of show,
      Dress’d neat, and soon became a beau.
      My body’s taper, tall and straight,
      I chiefly dwell among the great;
      Am like a bridegroom, clad in white,
      And much the ladies I delight;
      Attend when Chloe goes to rest,
      She’s always by my presence blest;
      No ghost or goblin can she fear,
      Nor midnight hag, if I am near.
      No more a seaman, bold and rough,
      I shine at balls, am fond of snuff
      To gay assemblies I repair,
      And make a brilliant figure there.
      At last, a burning fever came,
      That quite dissolved my tender frame;
      I wasted fast, light-headed grew;
      Of all my friends, not one I knew;
      Great drops of sweat ran down my side,
      And I, alas! by inches died.

  25. A word there is of plural number,
      Foe to peace and tranquil slumber;
      Add but to this the letter S,
      And though strange the metamorphosis,
      There soon will meet your wond’ring view
      One syllable transposed to two;
      Plural is plural now no more,
      And sweet what bitter was before.

  26. My first two letters make a man,
      My three first a woman;
      My four first letters make a great man
      My whole a great woman.

  27. My first is myself, a very short word;
      My second’s a puppet, and you are my third.

  28. Cut off my head, singular I am;
        Cut off my tail, and plural I appear;
      Cut off my head and tail, and you will find
        That though my body’s left, yet nought is there.
      What is my head cut off? a sounding sea;
        What is my tail? a mighty river,
      Within whose peaceful depths my whole doth play,
        And parent of sweet sounds is mute forever.

  29. We left our little ones at home,
        And whither went we did not know;
      We for the church’s sake did roam,
        And lost our lives in doing so.
      We went right onward on the road,
        With all the wicked full in view;
      We lived to man, we died to God,
       Yet nothing of religion knew.

  30. My first is a famous watering place in England,
      My second is a city where a mighty queen did dwell;
      My whole is the name of a queen famous in ancient history.

  31. My first gives light to man;
      My second you’ll find in woman;
      My third belongs to woman;
      My whole is a Christian name.

  32.   To run and draw,
        In peace or war,
      My first have long been used;
        And pleased or vex’d,
        Have, by my next,
      Been petted and abused:
        Upon the seas,
        In many a breeze,
      My third may oft be seen;
        My whole is an art
        Known in each part
      Where my two first have been.

  33. My whole is that which lightning does,
        Beheaded, that which horses fear;
      Behead again, and lo! a tree,
        A forest tree, will then appear.


An Enigmatical Dinner.

[Illustration:

1 The Grand Seignor’s Dominions.

2 Two Tailors.

3 An Ornamental part of the Head.

4 An Exquisite and the King of Beasts.

5 A Famous English Wit.

6 A Place where Money is made and Impudence.

7 Woman’s Weapon.

8 A Biped, and to depart.

9 A cooking Utensil, a Vowel and part of a foot.

10 A Biped from Noah’s Ark.

11 A Tailor’s Perquisites.]

[Illustration: Dessert.

1 A Cold Substance and the Best of Everything.

2 An Island in the Atlantic Ocean.

3 A Cure for Lazy Horses.

4 Pretended Suffering.

5 An Amusing and Talented Periodical.

6 Part of a River in Pennsylvania.

7 To Fret, and the Fruit of Temptation.

8 The Joint of an Animal.

9 Married People.

10 One-Third of Two, and a Firelock.

11 Running Streams.]


PARADOXES AND PUZZLES.

1. A CAPTAIN of a ship who was driven out to sea by a heavy storm,
found he had provisions sufficient for only half his crew, and decided
to throw overboard half of them, to be selected by lot. There were
twenty men, half of them white, and half black; he placed them all
in a circle, saying that every fifth man in three times round should
be thrown overboard. He appeared to arrange them carelessly, yet he
managed so that the lot fell to the ten black men. How could it be?

2. _The Wolf, the Goat and the Cabbages._—Suppose a man has a wolf, a
goat, and a basket of cabbages, on the bank of a river; he wishes to
cross with them, but his boat can only hold one of the three beside
himself. He must therefore take them over one by one, in such a manner
that the wolf shall have no opportunity to devour the goat, nor the
goat the cabbages. How is he to accomplish it?

3. _The impossibility made possible._—Place three pieces of money on
the table and desire some person to take away the piece from the centre
without touching it.

4. Two men eat oysters together for a wager, to see who could eat the
greatest number. One eat ninety-nine only, the other eat a hundred and
_won_. How many did the winner eat?

5. What is the difference between six dozen dozen and a half a dozen
dozen?

  6.  Four people sat down one evening to play;
      They played all that eve, and parted next day.
      Could you think, when you’re told, as thus they all sat,
      No other played with them, nor was there one bet;
      Yet, when they rose up, each gained a guinea,
      Tho’ none of them lost to the amount of a penny!

7. P R S V R Y P R F C T M N V R K P T H S P R C P T S T N. This
inscription was affixed to the communion-table of a small church in
Wales; no one could decipher it for centuries, but at length the clue
has been discovered. What is it?

8. Procure six cards, and having ruled them as in the following
diagrams, write in the figures neatly and legibly. It is required to
tell the number thought of by any person, the numbers being contained
in the cards, and not to exceed 60. How is this done?

  ┌————┬————┬————┬————┬————┬————┐        ┌————┬————┬————┬————┬————┬————┐
  │  3 │  5 │  7 │  9 │ 11 │  1 │        │  5 │  6 │  7 │ 13 │ 12 │  4 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 13 │ 15 │ 17 │ 19 │ 21 │ 23 │        │ 14 │ 15 │ 20 │ 21 │ 22 │ 23 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 25 │ 27 │ 29 │ 31 │ 33 │ 35 │        │ 28 │ 29 │ 30 │ 31 │ 36 │ 37 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 37 │ 39 │ 41 │ 45 │ 43 │ 47 │        │ 52 │ 38 │ 39 │ 44 │ 45 │ 46 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 49 │ 51 │ 53 │ 55 │ 57 │ 59 │        │ 47 │ 53 │ 54 │ 55 │ 60 │ 13 │
  └————┴————┴————┴————┴————┴————┘        └————┴————┴————┴————┴————┴————┘

  ┌————┬————┬————┬————┬————┬————┐        ┌————┬————┬————┬————┬————┬————┐
  │ 9  │ 10 │ 11 │ 12 │ 13 │  8 │        │  3 │  6 │  7 │ 10 │ 11 │  2 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 14 │ 15 │ 24 │ 25 │ 26 │ 27 │        │ 14 │ 15 │ 18 │ 19 │ 22 │ 23 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 28 │ 29 │ 30 │ 31 │ 40 │ 41 │        │ 26 │ 27 │ 30 │ 31 │ 34 │ 35 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 42 │ 43 │ 44 │ 45 │ 46 │ 47 │        │ 38 │ 39 │ 42 │ 43 │ 46 │ 47 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 56 │ 57 │ 58 │ 59 │ 60 │ 13 │        │ 50 │ 51 │ 54 │ 55 │ 58 │ 59 │
  └————┴————┴————┴————┴————┴————┘        └————┴————┴————┴————┴————┴————┘

  ┌————┬————┬————┬————┬————┬————┐        ┌————┬————┬————┬————┬————┬————┐
  │ 17 │ 18 │ 19 │ 20 │ 21 │ 16 │        │ 33 │ 34 │ 35 │ 36 │ 37 │ 32 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 22 │ 23 │ 24 │ 25 │ 26 │ 27 │        │ 38 │ 39 │ 40 │ 41 │ 42 │ 43 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 28 │ 29 │ 30 │ 31 │ 48 │ 49 │        │ 44 │ 45 │ 46 │ 47 │ 48 │ 49 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 50 │ 51 │ 52 │ 53 │ 54 │ 55 │        │ 50 │ 51 │ 52 │ 53 │ 54 │ 55 │
  ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤        ├————┼————┼————┼————┼————┼————┤
  │ 56 │ 57 │ 58 │ 59 │ 30 │ 60 │        │ 56 │ 57 │ 58 │ 59 │ 60 │ 41 │
  └————┴————┴————┴————┴————┴————┘        └————┴————┴————┴————┴————┴————┘


9. Place eight counters or coins, as in the diagram below:

                   ┌———┬———┬———┬———┬———┬———┬———┬———┐
                   │ 1 │ 2 │ 3 │ 4 │ 5 │ 6 │ 7 │ 8 │
                   └———┴———┴———┴———┴———┴———┴———┴———┘

It is then required to lay them in four couples, removing only one at a
time, and in each removal passing the one in the hand over two on the
table.

10. _The wine Merchant and his Clerk._—A wine merchant caused
thirty-two casks of choice wines to be deposited in his cellar, giving
orders to his clerk to arrange them as in the annexed figure, so that
each external row should contain nine. The clerk, however, took away
twelve of them, at three different times—that is, four at each time,
yet when the merchant went into the cellar, after each theft had been
committed, the clerk always made him count nine in each row. How was
this possible?

  ┌———┬———┬————┐
  │ 1 │ 7 │ 1  │
  ├———┼———┼————┤
  │ 7 │   │ 7  │
  ├———┼———┼————┤
  │ 1 │ 7 │ 1  │
  └———┴———┴————┘


11.              [Illustration]            man’s family.

12. First draw a square and divide it into four parts. Then make six
marks in the first square and say they represent six pigs, for you
pretend to describe a farmyard you once saw. In the next square make
six more marks to represent cows, in the next square six more marks for
horses, and the last square represent donkeys.

  ┌————————┬————————┐
  │        │        │
  │ ││││││ │ ││││││ │
  │        │        │
  ├————————┼————————┤
  │        │        │
  │ ││││││ │ ││││││ │
  │        │        │
  └————————┴————————┘


ARITHMETICAL PROBLEMS.

1. An old man married a young woman; their united ages amounted to one
hundred. The man’s age, multiplied by four and divided by nine, gives
the woman’s age. What were their respective ages?

2. How many yards of paper, three-quarters of a yard wide, will cover a
chamber that is sixty feet round, and ten feet one and one-half inches
high?

3. In a family of eight young people, it was agreed that three at a
time should visit the Crystal Palace, and that the visit should be
repeated each day as long as a different trio could be selected. In
how many days were the possible combinations of three out of eight
completed?

4. How many changes can be given to seven notes of a piano? That is to
say, in how many ways can seven keys be struck in succession, so that
there shall be some difference in the order of the notes each time?

5. At a time when eggs were scarce, an old woman who possessed some
good hens, wishing to oblige her friends, sent her daughter with a
basket of eggs to three of them; at the first house, which was the
squire’s, she left half the number of eggs she had, and half a one
over; at the second she left half of what remained and half an egg
over; and at the third she again left half of the remainder, and half
a one over; she carried home one egg in her basket, not having broken
any. How many had she when she started?

6. Two drovers, A and B, meeting on the road, began discoursing about
the number of sheep they each had. Says B to A, “Pray give me one of
your sheep and I will have as many as you.” “Nay,” replied A, “but give
me one of your sheep and I will have as many again as you.” Required to
know the number of sheep they each had?

7. To tell at what hour a person intends to rise. Let the person set
the hand of the dial of a watch at any hour he pleases, and tell you
what that hour is; and to the number of that hour you add in your mind
twelve; then tell him to count privately the number of that amount upon
the dial, beginning with the next hour to that on which he proposes to
rise, and counting backwards, first reckoning the number of the hour at
which he has placed the hand. How is it done?

“The Two Travelers.”

  8.  Two travelers trudged along the road together,
      Talking, as Yankees do, about the weather;
      When, lo! beside their path the foremost spies
      Three casks, and loud exclaims, “A prize, a prize!”
      One large, two small, but all of various size.
      This way and that they gazed, and all around,
      Each wondering if an owner might be found.
      But not a soul was there—the coast was clear—
      So to the barrels they at once drew near;
      And both agree, whatever may be there,
      In friendly partnership they’ll fairly share.
      Two they found empty, but the other full,
      And straightway from his pocket one doth pull
      A large clasp-knife; a heavy stone lay handy,
      And thus in time they found their prize was brandy.
      ’Tis tasted and approved; their lips they smack,
      And each pronounces ’tis the famous Cognac.
      “Wont we have many a jolly night, my boy?
      May no ill luck our present hopes destroy!”
      ’Twas fortunate one knew the mathematics,
      And had a smattering of hydrostatics;
      Then measured he the casks, and said, “I see
      This is eight gallons—those are five, and three.”
      The question then was how they might divide
      The brandy, so that each should be supplied
      With just four gallons, neither less nor more,
      With eight, and five and three, they puzzle sore;
      Filled up the five, filled up the three, in vain.
      At length a happy thought came o’er the brain
      Of one; ’twas done, and each went home content,
      And their good dames declared ’twas excellent.
      With those three casks they made division true;
      I found the puzzle out; say, friend, can you?

  9.  “To five and five and fifty-five
        The first of letters add;
      It is a thing that pleased a king,
        And made a wise man mad.”

  10. “The sum of four figures in value will be
        Above seven thousand nine hundred and three;
      But when they are halved you’ll find, very fair,
        The sum will be nothing, in truth, I declare.”


ANSWERS TO CONUNDRUMS.

1. GOLIAH.

2. He was his own son.

3. Because of the sand which is (sandwiches) there.

4. Because the children of Ham were bred (bread) and mustered (mustard)
there.

5. He is not at all black (a tall black).

6. The bed will not come to us.

7. There is not a single person in it.

8. He is crusty.

9. When it is ajar.

10. He had a lady in his head.

11. He is always forgetting (for-getting).

12. Because they are too long and too loose (Toulon and Toolouse).

13. R U E (are you he).

14. Adriatic (a dry attic).

15. Hymen.

16. It is a deck oration (decoration).

17. It follows the sea (C).

18. The cat’ll eat it (the cattle eat it).

19. There is no parting there.

20. S X (Essex).

21. He is ruffled.

22. She sows tares while the husbandman sleeps.

23. It is often told (tolled).

24. Because they found little profit (prophet) in the rushes on the
banks.

25. Because one is a taper in a cavern, the other a caper in a tavern.

26. Jeroboam, Samuel, Benjamin (Jerry beau ’em; Sam you will; Ben jam
in).

27. Herodias’ daughter, because she got ahead of John the Baptist on a
charger.

28. They were snaked out.

29. It took him forty days and nights to find Ara-rat.

30. Because we can not make them here (hear).

31. Fiddle-de-dee (Fiddle D D).

32. Because he is best known by his gait (gate).

33. “Its silvered o’er with care.”

34. Because it cannot be used till it is drawn.


ANSWERS TO ENIGMAS AND CHARADES.

1. Fire-fly.

2. Mur-mur.

3. Canada.

4. Sky-lark.

5. Ladder—adder.

6. Fast—Feast.

7. Counter-pane.

8. Truly.

9. Yesterday.

10. A bed.

11. Railway train.

12. Gold.

13. Candle-stick.

14. Hour-glass.

15. Flute.

16. Justice, (just-ice.)

17. A tree.

18. Alphabet.

19. The animal sent was an antelope, (aunt elope!) the fruit returned
was a cantelope (can’t elope.)

20. On I on, (onion.)

21. Broom.

22. The letter L.

23. The vowels.

24. A spermaceti candle.

25. Cares—s.

26. Heroine.

27. Idol.

28. Cod.

29. The kine that bore the ark. 1 Samuel, vi., 10, 12, 14.

30. Bathsheba.

31. Solomon.

32. Horse-man-ship.

33. Flash.

Answer to Enigmatical Dinner.

1. Turkey.

2. Parsnips.

3. Hare, (hair.)

4. Dandelion, (dandy-lion.)

5. Lamb.

6. Mint-sauce.

7. Tongue.

8. Mangoes.

9. Potatoes.

10. Ham.

11. Cabbage.

Dessert.

1. Ice cream.

2. Maderia, (wine.)

3. Whips.

4. Champagne, (sham-pain.)

5. Punch.

6. Brandy.

7. Pine-apples.

8. Hock.

9. Pears.

10. Trifle.

11. Currants.


ANSWERS TO PARADOXES AND PUZZLES.

1. The secret of the puzzle is to arrange the men by a simple formula;
take the sentence, “A gray owl did eat a snake,” and arrange them with
checkers, the vowels all black, the consonants white. You will then see
by taking away every fifth one, three times round, those left will be
all white.

2. First take over the goat, the next time the wolf; leaving the wolf
he must bring back the goat and leave it, then take the cabbages, and
going back once more he takes the goat. Thus the wolf will never be
left with the goat, nor the goat with the cabbages.

3. If the secret be not discovered, remove one of the end pieces to
the other side, thus you take away the piece from the centre without
touching it.

4. One hundred.

5. 792; six dozen dozen being 864, and a half a dozen dozen 72.

  6.  Four merry fiddlers played all night
      To many a dancing ninny;
      And the next morning went away,
      And each received a guinea.

  7.  Persevere ye perfect men,
      Ever keep these precepts ten.

It was discovered that by using the vowel E this couplet was formed.

8. Request the person to give you all the cards containing the number
he has fixed upon, and then add all the right hand upper corner figures
together, which will give the correct answer. For example: suppose 10
is the number thought of, the cards with 2 and 8 in the corners will be
given, which makes the answer 10.

9. Place 4 on 7, 6 on 2, 1 on 3, and 8 on 5, or 5 on 2, 3 on 7, 8 on 6,
4 on 1, &c.

10. The clerk arranged them thus:

          ┌———┬———┬———┐      ┌———┬———┬———┐      ┌———┬———┬———┐
          │ 2 │ 5 │ 2 │      │ 3 │ 3 │ 3 │      │ 4 │ 1 │ 4 │
          ├———┼———┼———┤      ├———┼———┼———┤      ├———┼———┼———┤
          │ 5 │   │ 5 │      │ 3 │   │ 3 │      │ 1 │   │ 1 │
          ├———┼———┼———┤      ├———┼———┼———┤      ├———┼———┼———┤
          │ 2 │ 5 │ 2 │      │ 3 │ 3 │ 3 │      │ 4 │ 1 │ 4 │
          └———┴———┴———┘      └———┴———┴———┘      └———┴———┴———┘

11. Be above meddling in a man’s family.

12. In the last square you must only make five marks, and then ask the
one you are talking to, to count and see if all are right; if you do
it carelessly and he is off his guard he will probably say “one of the
donkeys are wanting.” You then must slily say, “If you’ll jump in, all
will be right.” Such simple “sells” often cause a good laugh.


ANSWERS TO ARITHMETICAL PROBLEMS.

1. The man’s age was 69 years and 12 weeks. The woman’s, 30 years and
40 weeks.

2. 90 yards.

3. Multiply 8 × 7 × 6, and also 3 × 2 × 1, and divide the product of
the former, 336, by the product of the latter, 6, the result is 56, the
number of visits, a different two going each time.

4. 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1, result is 5,040, the number of changes.

5. 15 eggs.

6. A had seven and B had five sheep.

7. Suppose the hour he intends to rise be 8, and that he has placed the
hand at 5; you will add 12 to 5 and tell him to count 17 on the dial
first reckoning 5, the hour at which the index stands, and counting
backwards from the hour at which he intends to rise; and the number,
17, will necessarily end at 8, which shows that to be the hour he chose
to rise.

8. The five-gallon barrel was filled first, and from that the
three-gallon barrel, thus leaving two gallons in the five-gallon
barrel; the three-gallon barrel was then emptied into the eight-gallon
barrel, and the two gallons poured from the five-gallon barrel into
the empty three-gallon barrel; the five-gallon barrel was then filled,
and one gallon poured into the three-gallon barrel, therefore leaving
four gallons in the five-gallon barrel, one gallon in the eight-gallon
barrel, and three gallons in the three-gallon barrel, which was then
emptied into the eight-gallon barrel. Thus each person had four gallons
of brandy in the eight and five-gallon barrels respectively.

9. This puzzle has as yet no answer. I trust some of the readers of
this book will be able to send us a correct answer. It most surely can
be ascertained, as there is a way to solve it.

10. The four figures are 8 8 8 8, which being divided by a line drawn
through the middle, become  ̶8̶8̶8̶8̶. The sum of which is eight 0s, or
nothing.

[Illustration]




Games for Old and Young.


BLIND MAN’S BUFF is a popular, old-fashioned and delightful pastime,
too well known to render any description of it necessary. A more quiet
variety of blind man’s buff is played in the following manner: All the
company arrange themselves around the room, one being blinded in the
centre. Some one then either numbers them, or calls them by the names
of different towns or cities. Each one must remember the name given
him. Then the one who named them calls out to any two in the party,
such as: “Two and Ten change places,” or, “Boston go to New York,” &c.
Those called must quickly exchange places (on pain of a forfeit it they
do not), the one blinded trying to catch them on their way. The caller
must make them change places often, and from distant sides of the room,
so as to give the blinder a good chance. If he catches any one in the
act of changing his place, and calls his name correctly, the person
so caught must take the part of blind-man until, in turn, he catches
somebody else.


SHADOW BUFF.

SHADOW Buff is a variation of blind man’s buff. Though not as generally
known, it is equally amusing. A large piece of white cloth, or a linen
or cotton sheet, is suspended smoothly at one end of the room, at a
little distance from “Buffy,” who sits with his face towards the cloth,
and his back to the company. Behind him a light must be so placed as to
throw the shadows of persons passing between it and “Buffy” directly
on the curtain. All other lights must be extinguished. The players
then walk, one by one, slowly between the light and “Buffy” (who must
not turn his head), limping, jumping, grimacing, or disguised as they
please, so as to distort their shadows on the curtain. If “Buffy” can
tell correctly to whom any shadow belongs (guessing once only at each
person), the player whom he so discovers takes his place as “Buffy.”


BLIND MAN’S WAND.

THIS is another variety of the same game. The blind man carries a cane,
which he reaches in every direction. Whoever it touches is bound, by
the rules of the game, to take hold of it, and repeat whatever the
blind man orders. The one who is caught can disguise his voice as he
pleases. The blind man is allowed three guesses, and if he cannot
discover the person touched by his voice, he must try another. This is
an amusing change.

There is still another, called “Fettered Buff.” The person who is to
catch his companions is not blinded, but his wrists are tied behind
him, and he catches by running backwards. This form of the game is
not recommended. The person so bound cannot balance himself easily, or
guard himself, and is liable to injury from falling.


CHINESE SHADOWS.

THIS can be played only in the evening, by candle light. A white
curtain should be fastened smoothly at one end of the room, as in
“shadow buff.” Half the company must be spectators and half actors.
The spectators must be seated facing the curtain. Two persons in front
should hold a ribbon or stick across the curtain as high as they can
easily reach, to mark the line on which the shadows are to move, or a
line may be drawn across the curtain. The actors must stand behind the
spectators, at a little distance, with a large supply of figures cut
in paper, such as houses, trees, men, women, animals, birds, &c. These
figures must be slowly passed along, one after the other, in the manner
you wish the shadows to fall on the curtain. It is easy to make them
advance, retreat, &c., while you hold conversation for them. Those who
are skillful in the use of these shadows, can make them represent a
battle, game, contra dance, &c. The figures of inanimate things must
not be moved; birds can be suspended on the ends of strings, and swung
about irregularly, from time to time. The effect is not unlike a magic
lantern. When the actors have played long enough, they must change
places with the spectators.


“THE COMICAL CONCERT.”

THIS game, when well played, is extremely diverting. The players are
arranged as an orchestra, and each one undertakes to imitate some
musical instrument. One pretends to play the violin, by stretching
out her left arm, and moving her right hand across it, as if she were
drawing a bow; another doubles up her hands and puts them to her mouth,
to imitate a horn; another moves her fingers on a table, to imitate a
piano; another takes the back of a chair and touches the rounds, as if
they were the strings of a harp; another motions as if beating a drum;
another holds a stick, after the manner of a guitar, and pretends to
play upon it; another appears to be turning a hand-organ; another plays
a flute, trombone, or any instrument he fancies—even a jewsharp. This
is but half the game. Each musician should, while playing, make a sound
with his mouth, in imitation of his instrument, thus:

  Rub-a-dub, goes the drum;
  Twang, twang, goes the harp
  Toot, too, hoo, goes the horn;
  Tweedle-dee, tweedle-dee, goes the violin, &c.

If all play with spirit it makes a laughable jumble. The leader must
stand facing the orchestra, with a long stick, beating time, in an
absurd imitation of some famous leader. In the midst of the noise and
fun, he suddenly stops, and pointing his wand of office to one of the
players, asks, abruptly, “Why don’t you play better?” The one spoken to
must answer instantly, and with suitable reference to the nature of his
instrument. For instance, the drummer could say one of his drumsticks
is broken; the harper, that a string is loose; the pianist, that a key
is broken or out of tune; the violinist, that a string is broken, &c.
If they hesitate a moment, or give an unsuitable answer, or if they
repeat an excuse already made, they must pay a forfeit or take a new
instrument. While one is answering, all must stop playing. When the
leader waves aloft his wand, all must commence again, and play till he
speaks to some one else; so on till they are weary. Sometimes it is a
rule that all who laugh must pay a forfeit. There are many forfeits in
that case.


THE MENAGERIE.

THIS is a noisy game. All the actors in the play must take seats around
the room, while some one or two of the number must be chosen to give
out the parts. The persons so chosen whisper in the ear of each one the
name of some animal he is to imitate. When all are ready and the signal
is given by one chosen for the purpose, each one commences to utter
sounds in imitation of the animal named to him. Those who fail must pay
some penalty. It cannot be called a “concord of sweet sounds,” but such
a game will give life to a too quiet company on a stormy Winter evening.


QUAKER MEETING.

THOSE who join the game take seats around the room, and one or more
whispers in the ear of each one some witty or absurd thing for him to
do. All must be quiet who are not playing. When all are ready, one
person claps his hands, and the first one must proceed to do what he
was told; the others must not speak or laugh, on penalty of a forfeit.
Each one in turn must act his or her part. It must all be in pantomime.
When all are through, each person must turn and shake hands with his or
her neighbor, saying: “Friend, how dost thee do?” It is important in
this game that the one who gives the parts should be full of humor and
of quick perceptions, so as to adapt the game to the persons playing.
The parts assigned may be of endless variety. One person may be
ordered to play a mock bravura on a table for a piano; another to gaze
in admiration of himself in a mirror and arrange his dress and hair;
another to act the scornful belle, while a gentleman acts the urgent
but despairing lover; one to dance a hornpipe, another to make a speech
by gestures, another to make grimaces in the face of every one in the
company, another to pretend terror and fright from some imaginary
animal, etc.


RESEMBLANCES.

ONE of the company taking part in this amusement rises, and addressing
his or her neighbor, proposes the following question: “What does
my thought resemble?” The person interrogated replies as he or she
pleases; then the questioner adds: “In what way does the object you
designate resemble that which I am thinking of?” If, as frequently
occurs, there exists no affinity, no resemblance between the two, a
pawn must be given by the person interrogated. Here is an example:

_Mary._—Tell me, Alice, what does my thought resemble?

_Alice._—A windmill.

_Mary._—I thought of Rogers’ poetry; what resemblance is there between
his poems and a windmill?

_Alice._—I can give an answer very readily; perhaps the very prettiest
little poem written by your poet begins, “Mine be a cot beside the
mill.”

_Mary._—That is right; it is now your turn, Annie. What does my
thought resemble?

_Annie._—A chandelier.

_Mary._—I thought of a partridge; how does a partridge resemble a
chandelier?

_Annie._—Dear me, I’m sure I cannot tell! I will give you my pawn.

This play, by the strange inconsistencies which it authorizes,
exercises the imagination, and brings into play a good deal of wit.


PUT IN A WORD.

SOME one in the company leaves the room, while those remaining select
a word, and then send for the person to return. She must ask some
question of the person nearest to her, to which the one spoken to
must make a prompt answer, and in answering he must make use of the
word selected. Sometimes an acute person will guess the word from the
answer given to her first question. Some awkward use or slight emphasis
may betray it, but generally she will go to a number and sometimes to
all present without guessing the word. In that case (unless some one
volunteers to take her place), she must go out again. If she discovers
the word, the one by whose answer she guessed it, leaves the room, and
those remaining choose a word and the game proceeds as before.


PROVERBS.

THE company select some one to leave the room; those remaining agree
upon a proverb, such as “All is not gold that glitters,” and then send
for the person to return to the room. She must ask questions of the
company in turn. The first person asked must include in his answer the
first word of the proverb, “all,” the next person, “is,” and so on
till they complete the proverb; if she has not guessed it, and there
are more in the company, the next person begins the proverb anew. The
one by whose answer the proverb is guessed must then leave the room.
This game requires considerable ingenuity and readiness. The proverbs
selected should be familiar ones, such as “Make hay while the sun
shines,” “When poverty comes in at the door love flies out at the
window,” “A fool is wise in his own conceit,” “A stitch in time saves
nine,” “Never look a gift horse in the mouth,” “All’s well that ends
well,” “A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.”


GAME OF CHARACTERS.

A PERSON chosen leaves the room. Those remaining select some familiar
character either in history or of the present day, for the absent one
to personate. When he returns, the person nearest him addresses him
by a question, as if he were the character selected. In like manner,
each person in the company in turn asks a question. The one at whose
questions he guesses the character must take his place and leave the
room in turn. For instance, “Napoleon the present emperor of France”
is selected. When the person returns, the first questioner exclaims,
“Are you not in constant fear of being killed?” The next, “Are you
really happy?” The third, “Why are you so despotic?” The fourth, “Do
you believe in fatalism?” Fifth, “Do you worship the memory of your
uncle?” “Why do you not like us Americans?” etc., etc. This play is
often very amusing and tact is required to ask questions that apply to
the character and are not too plain.


LAWYER.

ALL who take part in the play assemble and choose a lawyer. The chairs
in the room are arranged in two rows, as in a contra dance. If there
are an equal number of gentlemen and ladies, the former choose their
partners. The gentlemen take seats opposite the ladies. The lawyer
proceeds to ask such questions as he chooses. The person addressed
must never answer, but his partner must answer for him. If either make
a mistake, he or she must change places with the lawyer, and ask the
questions. If the lawyer is ready in asking questions, turning quickly
from one person to another, he can very soon catch some one.


CONSEQUENCES.

THIS is a quiet game. All assemble around a table. Each person must
have a half sheet of note paper and a pencil. All are requested to
write an adjective expressing either a good or bad quality in a man’s
character. Each one then turns over and creases down the place written
upon, and all change papers. Each one then writes a gentleman’s name,
and turns it down, and all change papers again. Then another word of
quality applying to a lady, is written, and all the papers are turned
down and changed as before. Then a lady’s name is written. Then a place
where they met; then what he said to her; then what she said to him;
what he gave to her; and what she gave to him; then the “consequences.”
The paper must be turned down every time and changed, and no one must
read what the others have written. When all are finished, some person
collects and reads the papers. Some are absurd, and others happen very
correctly. For instance, they might read thus: “The clumsy Mr. Snooks
met the beautiful Miss Primrose at a ball. He asked her if she liked
turnips; she sighed and hung her head, and said, ‘If mamma is willing.’
He gave her a bouquet; she gave him a box on the ear. The consequences
were too sad to relate.” A party of merry girls and boys will like this
game for a variety.


FOX AND GEESE.

THIS game is a very old one, but it is too good not to be always
remembered. Arrange the company in this form, all facing inward:—

[Illustration]

The stars represent persons; the one outside the circle, but next to
it, is the goose; the one most distant from the circle, the fox. When
the game commences, the goose starts and places himself or herself in
front of one of the two stars. Then the outside one becomes the goose,
and the object of the fox is to touch the outside one of three; if
he succeeds, they change places, and the one caught becomes the fox.
Every one must be on the alert, and change as quickly as possible. I
have seen this game, on a stormy day at the seashore, played with great
zeal by old gentlemen, judges, lawyers, ministers, mothers, fathers and
children. One gray-haired gentleman was the fleetest fox of all; no one
could escape him, and his laugh made all hearts glad. Green old age
is beautiful to see, and the youthful are always made happier by its
genial sympathy.


STAGE-COACH.

ALL who join this game should be seated, with the exception of the
story-teller. If there are vacant chairs, they should either be turned
over or taken out of the room. A person with a quick memory and a flow
of words, should be selected for the office of story-teller. When all
are seated, he or she passes around the circle, giving a name to each
individual. When the story is told, the one whose name is mentioned
must rise and whirl around. When “stage-coach” is mentioned, all must
rise and turn around; when it is said the “stage-coach tips over,”
all must change places, and the story-teller then takes his chance to
secure a seat, and the one who is left without any seat must go on
with the story—the former story-teller taking the name of the person
who takes his place. If any one fails to turn around or change places
according to the rules of the game, a forfeit must be paid. The common
way of telling the story is to describe the “Fidget family, on a
journey in a stage-coach.” The following names are generally given to
the company: Mr. and Mrs. Fidget, the baby and nurse, Miss Fidget and
Master Fidget, and maiden aunt; gingerbread, band-box, trunks, bundles,
off horse, nigh horse, driver, whip, reins, driver’s seat, cushions,
door, curtains, wheels, footman, &c. You must adapt your names to the
number playing. In telling the story, it makes more fun to keep one or
two (who will bear the joke) constantly whirling. The story and names
are at the will of the story-teller.


HUNT THE FOX.

TAKE partners, and stand as in a contra dance. The lady at the head
is the fox; her partner the hunter. At a signal, she starts and runs
down the line, her partner following; she can pass through the lines
as she pleases, the players standing far enough apart to allow her to
pass easily. The hunter must follow the exact course of the fox; if he
varies, he must pay a forfeit. When the fox is caught, the first couple
goes to the foot, and the next couple goes through with the same. This
and “Follow the Leader” are favorite games for Thanksgiving evenings.
Old and young join.


SNEEZING.

ALL who join this game assemble in a circle. The leader gives one
of these syllables, “Ash-ish-osh,” to each one. Thus, to the first
person, “Ash;” the second, “ish;” third, “osh;” fourth, “ash,” and
so on through all the company. The leader must then stand in the
centre and count four, slowly. When he pronounces four, all must sound
their syllables at once. The effect is very amusing; it sounds like a
prolonged sneeze.


THE READY WRITER.

THIS game can be played by any number of persons, each one having a
pencil and paper. The leader of the game gives to each one (or each
player chooses) a letter in the alphabet. Each player then writes a
sentence of five, six or seven words, each word commencing with the
letter given him. When all have finished, each one in turn reads his
sentence. If any one fails, he or she must recite some poetry and pay a
forfeit. This game often produces most amusing and instructive effects.
Sometimes the leader requires each player to go through the alphabet,
as follows:

  Avoid avarice, as an asp.
  Britons! be bold! be brave!
  Constant crime causes careless consciences.
  Do defer doing dirty deeds.
  Even every engineer engaged escaped.
  Fawning favorites fear fortune’s freaks.
  God’s goodness gives great gifts.
  Happy homes have happy hearts.
  It is instruction I intend.
  Keep kind, kinsfolk! keep kind!
  Jockeys joyfully joking jaded jackasses.
  Little lambs love long lanes.
  Many men make much money.
  Name nine noisy noblemen now.
  Ostentation often operates on opulence.
  Perfect piety produces pretty practices.
  Quit, quibbling quacks, quarreling, quickly.
  Round rough rocks ragged rascals run.
  Such stings sting so sharply.
  Try to turn topsy-turvy.
  Up! up! ungrateful, unjust usurper!
  Verily, verily, vice vilifies virtue.
  Willing wives will wash well.
  Yes, yet you yawned yesterday.
  Zeal! zeal! zealous zary, zeal!


RHYMING WORDS IN PANTOMIME.

ALL who desire to join in this charming pastime must be seated in a
circle, in order that each player can have a clear view of all the
other players. One of the company must be selected to commence the
game. He must think of some word which can be easily rhymed by other
words, and give out only the termination of the word to the other
players, saying “I have thought of a word that rhymes with ——, can
any of you guess it?” The players must next speak in answer to the
leader’s question, but whoever thinks of a word to rhyme with the given
termination must strive to act out the word he thinks of in pantomime,
as plainly as possible, and the leader must closely watch the player
who is acting the word, and as soon as he guesses what the person
acting is trying to represent, if it is not the word selected, he must
say, “It is not ——,” (calling out the word represented) “that I
thought of,” and so on as each player acts out a word, the leader must
call out the word represented until the right word is acted. The leader
must then resign his place, and the person who acted out the right word
must be the leader and think of a word, giving out the termination to
be rhymed with. An example will here be given to assist those ignorant
of this game.

Suppose the person who first selects a word chooses “sting” and gives
out “ing” to be rhymed with. One of the players makes a motion with
his hands of ringing a bell. The leader says, “It is not ring, to ring
a bell.” Another player will by signs indicate a ring on the finger.
The leader exclaims, “It is not a finger-ring.” One of the players
will imitate wringing of clothes. The leader says, “It is not wring.”
Another represents singing, and is told “it is not sing.” A player will
perhaps imitate a bee stinging. Then the leader exclaims, “Sting is
the word, I resign my place to you.” Perhaps a few examples of rhyming
words easily acted may be useful, which will be given here.

            Sun.      Hair.      Map.      Hill.     Sheep.
            Dun.      Hare.      Cap.      Kill.     Deep.
            Pun.      Pair.      Lap.      Mill.     Weep.
            Run.      Pear.      Rap.      Fill.     Keep.
            Gun.      Bear.      Snap.     Still.    Creep.
            Fun.      Fair.      Trap.     Rill.     Reap.
            Spun.     Prayer.    Flap.     Sill.     Cheap.
            Bun.      Flare.     Clap.     Bill.     Leap.


AN EXHIBITION OF THE MODERN GIANT.

THIS is rare sport, when well managed, and for a time the exhibition
appears very mysterious to the uninitiated. A large sheet should be
strained across some open door; folding doors are better adapted to
this game, as they give a larger space for action.

The room in which the spectators are seated should be darkened; but
in the room back of the curtain, where the Giant exhibits, should be
placed on the floor, a bright lamp or candle, with a reflector, either
of polished tin or a looking glass. Any one standing between the light
and curtain, appears immense in all his proportions, as his reflection
is cast upon the sheet. Let the person acting as the Giant first open
his hands and spread his fingers wide, and let them appear at the
bottom of the curtain, and gradually rise till the shadow of his whole
body is exhibited between the light and the curtain. He will appear to
rise from the cellar; then let him jump over the light, to the rear of
the reflector, and it will seem as if he jumped upwards through the
ceiling.

Many amusing scenes can be thus contrived, articles of furniture, etc.,
etc., can be called down from above by simply passing them over the
light. Dolls can be used with great effect. The Giant can appear to
swallow them—or destroy the pigmy race. Care should be taken to keep
the profile on the screen or curtain as distinct as possible. Some call
this game “The man in the moon came down too soon.”


THE SHADOW AT COMMAND.

THIS feat is performed by means of confederacy. Having privately
apprised your confederate that when you strike one blow, it signifies
the letter A; when you strike two, it means B; and so on for the rest
of the alphabet; you state to the company that if any one will walk
into the adjoining room, and have the door locked upon him, perhaps
the animal may appear which another person may name. In order to
deter every one except your confederate from accepting the offer, you
announce at the same time that the person who volunteers to be shut
up in the room must be possessed of considerable courage, or he had
better not undertake it. Having thus gained your end, you give your
confederate a lamp, which burns with a very dismal light, telling him,
in the hearing of the company, to place it on the middle of the floor,
and not to feel alarmed at what he may happen to see. You then usher
him into the room, and lock the door. You next take a piece of blank
paper and a pencil, and, giving them to one of the party, you tell
him to write the name of any animal he wishes to appear to the person
shut up in the room. This being done, you receive back the paper, and
after showing it around to the company, you fold it up, burn it in the
candle or lamp, and throw the ashes into a mortar (an iron one is the
best), casting in at the same time a powder, which you state to be
possessed of valuable properties. Having taken care to read what was
written, you proceed to pound the ashes in the mortar, thus: Suppose
the word written be “cat,” you begin by stirring the pestle around the
mortar several times, and then strike three distinct blows, loud enough
for your confederate to hear, and by which he knows that the first
letter of the word is C. You next make some irregular evolutions of
the pestle around the mortar, that it may not appear to the company
that you give nothing but blows, and then strike one blow for A. Work
the pestle about again, and then strike twenty blows, which he will
know means T—finishing your manœuvre by working the pestle about the
mortar, the object being to make the blows as little remarkable as
possible. You then call aloud to your confederate, and ask him what he
sees. At first he is to make no reply; after being interrogated several
times, he asks if it is not a cat.

That no mistake be made, each party should repeat to himself the
letters of the alphabet in the order of the blows. If he misses,
you might go over, pretending you had forgotten some word in your
incantations, as you can mumble to yourself when pounding. If your
confederate is a good mimic, it would add to the amusement of all to
mimic the sounds of the animal to appear to him.

I have seen this game differently performed. Your confederate, after
any word has been chosen, returns to the room, and you give assurance
that by your magical art you can inform him of the word. You then
take a cane and draw a large circle, and at the same time repeat any
absurd jingle or formula of words; then pretend to call up some ancient
spirit, and by your raps on the floor tell your confederate your first
letter. Then pretend to draw magical figures, and repeat anything you
think of; pretend to listen for an answer; then call up some different
spirit, and by your distinct raps express the second letter; and so on
until the word is finished. This game can be made very amusing.


THE WIZARD OF THE EAST.

THE principal performer attires himself in a robe, a paper cap,
spectacles, and other appointments necessary to the outfit of the
“Wizard of the East.” He is armed with a magic wand, by means of which
he is supposed to exercise his mysterious calling, and with which he
makes a circle on the ground, muttering at the same time the unearthly
words of some potent spell. After communing profoundly for some moments
with some imaginary familiar, he appears to have decided, and touches
one of his confederates with his wand, ordering him to go to the other
end of the room, and there blindfold his eyes. This order executed,
and the audience satisfied that the confederate is really blindfolded,
the wizard orders him to guess the person on whom his wand shall rest.
The wizard then proceeds to touch several persons lightly with the
wand, saying at each, “The wand moves,” and at length allows it to rest
on the shoulder of _the one who spoke last_ (the key to the trick),
exclaiming, “The wand rests.” The confederate will at once name the
person touched (who, also being a confederate, has purposely spoken
last). The latter takes the place of the person blindfolded, and the
wizard goes through with the same form; his confederate exciting them
to talk, he again touches the one who spoke last; the confederate names
him correctly, and the person touched is blindfolded in turn. Unless he
understands the game, he will have only chance to guide him, and will
rarely guess correctly. Those who fail, pay a forfeit. Sometimes one of
the confederates takes the place of the wizard, and further mystifies
the company. This game, though simple, often puzzles a room full.


TO BRING A PERSON DOWN UPON A FEATHER

THIS is a practical pun:—You desire any one to stand on a chair or
table, and you tell him that notwithstanding his weight you will
bring him down upon a feather. You then leave the room, and procuring
a feather you give it to him, and tell him you have performed your
promise, that you engaged to bring him down upon a feather, which you
have done, for there is the feather, and if he looks he’ll find down
upon it.


THE APPARENT IMPOSSIBILITY.

YOU profess yourself able to show any one what he never saw before,
what you never saw, and what no one ever saw, and which after you two
have seen, no one else ever shall see. After requesting the company to
guess this riddle, and they have professed themselves unable to do so,
produce a nut, and having cracked it, take out the kernel, and ask them
if they have ever seen it before; of course they answer no; you reply,
“Neither have I, and I think you will confess that nobody else has ever
seen it, and now no one shall see it again;” saying which, you put the
kernel into your mouth and eat it.


THE TURNED HEAD.

LET a lady be invested with as many wrappings as possible, but cloak,
shawl, scarf, &c., must be put on wrong side before, so as to present
the appearance of a “Turned Head.” She should be furnished with a muff,
which she must hold behind her as nearly as possible in the usual
manner, but her bonnet must be put on the proper way. Thus equipped she
must enter the room backwards and pass around it in that manner. This
can be used as a forfeit.


STATUARY.

STATUARY, when personated by intelligent ladies and gentlemen, can
be made very amusing. Some witty gentleman, well versed in statuary,
takes the part of showman. He first selects from the company those he
wishes to assist him, being careful to select only such as can best
control their countenances. After obtaining a number of sheets, he
takes possession of a parlor, shutting the rest of the company out. He
then arranges his assistants as statuary around the room as quickly
as possible, covering each one, or each group, with a sheet; then
throws open the door, and invites the company to a rare exhibition of
statuary. After making a grandiloquent speech he uncovers a group, and
gives as absurd a description as possible; so on through the whole.

As fun is the chief object, take for example some tall plain gentleman
and place him with bow in hand for Cupid. For Diogenes, take a large
wash tub and a boy in it, &c. Another diversion is to cover some ladies
and gentlemen all but one eye with a sheet; then let the company guess
who they are.


HE CAN DO LITTLE WHO CAN’T DO THIS.

ARRANGE yourselves in a circle. The one who knows the game takes a cane
in his left hand and pounds upon the floor with it, saying, “He can do
little who can’t do this,” and passes the cane with his right hand to
his right hand neighbor, who tries to do the same thing, but generally
fails. The catch consists in quickly changing the cane from the left
to the right hand before you pass it. Every one is then intent on your
manner of pounding the cane on the floor. Change hands as carelessly as
possible.


BROTHER! I AM BOBBED!

A PERSON who understands the game proposes to another, who is ignorant
of it, to be blinded with him and be “bobbed.” After being blindfolded
they sit down in two chairs placed back to back. The one who knows the
game then removes the bandage from his eyes and ties a knot in his
handkerchief. The others join hands and go round them in a circle. The
one not blindfolded carelessly hits the other with his handkerchief.
The one struck of course, thinks himself hit by some one in the circle,
and exclaims, “brother, I am bobbed.” The other says, “who bobbed you?”
In answer he mentions the name of some one in the ring. They all call
out, “you are wrong,” so he is bobbed till the fun is exhausted, he
trying to guess the person who hit him and expecting to change places
when he guesses correctly. The other pretends he is hit occasionally
and calls out he is bobbed. It requires a good-natured person to take
the joke pleasantly.


HOW DO YOU LIKE IT? WHEN DO YOU LIKE IT? AND WHERE WILL YOU PUT IT?

THE difficulty of this game consists in guessing the meaning of two or
more nouns, which sound alike but have different meanings, without any
other help than the answers given to the above questions. It is played
in the following manner. One of the company is sent out of the room and
not recalled until her companions have agreed upon two words of similar
sound, with which to puzzle her. When she comes in she asks, “How do
you like it?” One answers, “very much indeed,” or “I don’t like it
early in the morning;” another says, “It is too noisy;” another, “It
is too fond of fine clothes,” &c. She then asks, “When do you like
it?” One answers, “At all times;” another, “When I feel hungry for my
dinner;” another, “I want it when walking alone;” another, “When I want
some wood brought for my fire,” &c. Lastly she asks, “Where would you
put it?” One says, “I would hang it;” another, “I would shut it up in a
church-tower;” another, “I would take it to a ball-room,” &c.

From such answers a witty little girl may guess that belle was the
chosen word, (belle, a fashionable lady, and bell, an instrument of
sound.) Such as do not guess must pay a forfeit. Many words might be
chosen for this game, such as hair, hare; reign, rain; date, a fruit
and date a period of time; whip to strike with, and whip to eat; pear,
pair; heir, air; ale, ail; mason a brick-layer, mason a member of a
secret society; beer, bier; see and sea.


THE BIRD-CATCHER.

ALL who join this game must be seated in a circle, first choosing a
bird-catcher, who takes his or her place in the centre. He can give the
name of a bird to each person, or each can select one, but each one
must represent some bird, and one of the number must personate an owl.
The bird-catcher then tells a story, introducing the names of different
birds. Every bird when mentioned must immediately make a chirrup,
crow, screech or splutter, peculiar to its species. The slightest
delay or mistake is punished by a forfeit. Each player, until the owl
is mentioned, must rest his hands on his knees; but when the owl is
called, each player must instantly clasp his hands behind him. The
bird-catcher tries to seize the hand of one of the players before he
raises it from his knee; if he succeeds, the person so caught must pay
a forfeit or take the bird-catcher’s place, his name and place in the
aviary being taken by the late officer. If he fails to entrap any one,
he must pay a forfeit, and continue the story until he does, or has
paid a certain number of forfeits; another then takes his place, either
by lot or choice. The company must keep their hands behind them until
some other bird is mentioned, when they must return them promptly. It
is well to mention the owl twice in succession, but no one must change
the second time; the owl must make his peculiar cry whenever he is
mentioned. The following is a list of available birds, with sounds
peculiar to them, taken from undoubted authorities:—

The Cock—“Cook a doodle doo.”

The Hen—“Cut, cut, cut, ca da cut.”

The Chicken—“Peep, peep, peep.”

The Turkey—“Gobble, obble obble.”

The Duck—“Quack, quack, quack.”

The Canary—“Pretty Dick.”

The Magpie—“Jack wants his dinner.”

The Sparrow—“Chip, chip.”

The Whippowill—“Whip po will.”

The Parrot—“Pretty Poll; Poll wants cracker.”

The Curlew—“Pe-wit, pe-wit.”

The Crow—“Caw, caw, caw.”

The Goose—“Hiss—s—s.”

The Raven—“Cro-a-ak.”

The Snowbird—“Chick-adee-dee.”

The Owl—“To-wit, to-wit, to-whoo.”

These sounds of course can be varied to suit the idea of the performer.
Parrot and magpie can be made to speak as they wish. The raven may be
made to say, “Never more,” according to Poe’s poem. But the sounds
agreed upon at the beginning must not be changed during the game.
Some amusement can be gained by giving appropriate names to different
persons. The owl could be given to the most learned in the company.
The best singer, the nightingale, could be represented by a few bars
of Jenny Lind’s melodies. The magpie could be given to a great talker.
When all are ready the bird-catcher might commence in the following
manner:—

I went out the other morning with my gun and nets to catch a few birds.
I did not intend robbing a farm yard, but on the top of a railing I
saw a fine cock; (“Cock a doodle do,”) there was nobody looking and I
couldn’t resist it—when up came an enormous turkey. (“Gobble, obble,
obble.”) Oh! Oh! said I, a turkey, (“Gobble, obble, obble”)—well a
turkey (“Gobble, obble, obble”) is worth more than a little sparrow,
(“Chip, chip,”) and there is more to eat on it than on a curlew,
(“Pewit, pewit,”) and as I had made up my mind to steal a cock, (“Cock
a doodle do,”) why not a goose, (“His, s, s,”) or a turkey. (“Gobble,
obble, obble.”) I crept up to him, when all of a sudden a rascally
magpie (“Jack wants his dinner”) flew out of a bush, making such an
abominable noise that all the birds in the air (general cry without
moving the hands) took flight at once. Off went the turkey (“Gobble,
obble, obble”) on one side and the cock (“Cock a doodle do”) on the
other, scattering a flock of ducks. (“Quack, quack.”) There was not
a single bird in sight but the owl. (“To whit! to whit! to whoo.”)
All hands up. [A forfeit given either by the unlucky bird-catcher
who has not succeeded in catching a hand, or by a bird whose hand he
has caught; in either case, he who remains, or becomes bird-catcher,
continues.] As I was saying, the owl [dead silence except the sound of
the owl, all hands still behind] began making an extraordinary noise,
no doubt thinking himself the nightingale, [the nightingale sings a
bar from the “Daughter of the Regiment;” all hands down on the knees
immediately. Forfeits from those too late, or in too great a hurry
to replace them,] and all the birds in the air [general cry] flocked
round again to see what the matter could be. Up came the crow, (“Caw,
caw,”) the raven, (“Croak,” or “never more,” as agreed on) the wild
duck, (“Quack! quack!”) even the farmer’s parrot, (“Pretty Poll,”) in
fact, all the birds in the field, [dead silence.] “Oh! ho!” I said,
“now I shall put some salt on you,” when to my horror, the beast of an
owl—(“To whit, to whit, to whoo!”)—[all hands disappear as before,
and the bird-catcher darts forward to catch some one. Whenever the
bird-catcher says, “All the birds in the air”—every bird must answer
at once.]


QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS.

ALL take partners and sit opposite each other. Then one person whispers
a different question in the ear of each on one side of the room, and
another gives an answer to each on the opposite side. The first couple
commence. One asks the question whispered to him, his partner gives the
answer whispered to her. Each couple take turn in giving the questions
and answers. A lady should direct the gentlemen, and a gentleman the
ladies. Each side asks the questions alternately, the side that first
asked the questions next making the answers.


THE MAGIC WAND.

THE magician, or the person who wields the wonderful wand, has a
confederate who retires from the room. In his absence, the company
(the magician being present) agree upon some piece of furniture or
other article, by which the powers of the wand are to be tested. He is
then called in and the magician points to various articles about the
room. Whenever he points to any article except the one agreed upon,
the confederate is sure to say “that is not it,” and he never fails
to designate the right article when the wand is pointed towards it.
This proceeding, which at first sight appears mysterious, is easily
explained. When the magician points to the article agreed upon by the
company he slightly changes the position of the forefinger of the hand
in which he holds the wand, or makes some slight gesture previously
agreed upon by him and his confederate. The confederate looks intently
at every article pointed out and pretends to be thinking deeply, while
the company are generally so intent on following his movements that
they do not notice the almost imperceptible motions of the magician.
If one of the company thinks he has detected the trick, he takes the
confederate’s place, and sometimes finds himself mistaken. If the
magician is a very mysterious personage he will be apt to magnetize the
confederate at the beginning of the game.

The “Black Art” is another form of the same game. The magician next
before pointing at the article agreed upon, points towards some
object of a black color, and in that way gives the information to his
confederate.


THE RHYMING GAME.

WHERE several are passing an evening quietly together, this game may
afford much amusement. It is played as follows: Each one of the company
writes a single word on a slip of paper; the more unusual and difficult
the word is to rhyme with, the more amusement it makes. These slips of
paper are placed in a hat, and each one of the company, in turn, draws
one, and then writes a couplet, in which the word drawn shall stand
at the end of a line, and the word at the end of the other line shall
rhyme with it. Of course, each may write as much more as he pleases.
Where the company are witty and ready, and have a faculty of making
verses easily, the game is a pleasant one. Epigrams on the company
present, puns and good-natured hits, add much to the fun in this game.


THE GAME OF TWENTY QUESTIONS.

THIS is one of the best of the games, though but little known. Such men
as Canning, Wyndham and Pitt have played it; the latter two, indeed,
were especially fond of it; so it does not lack recommendation. The
rules of the game and its description are briefly these:

Two persons (usually a lady and gentleman), chosen by the company,
privately fix upon an article or subject. Two others are then chosen to
discover the subject so agreed upon, and they must do this by asking
twenty questions as to its nature and qualities. A fifth person is
usually selected as umpire, who is made acquainted with the subject
fixed upon, and whose duty it is to see that all the questions are
fairly put and answered. The questions are to be put plainly, though in
the alternative, if desired, and the answers must be plain and direct.
The object of the thoughts must not be an abstract idea, or anything
so occult, or scientific, or technical, as to be beyond the reasonable
information of the company, but something well known to the present
day, or to general history. It may be, for example, any name of renown,
ancient or modern, or any well known work or memorial of art, but not
a mere event, as a battle, for instance. Of course, the discovery, if
made, is to be the fair result of mental inference from the questions
and answers, not of signs passing, or juggling of any description.

Mr. Pitt is said to have once succeeded in this game, when the subject
was _The stone upon which Walworth, Lord Mayor of London, stood, when
he struck down Wat. Tyler, in Richard II.’s time_!

In a game in which Mr. Canning was the questioner, the questions and
answers were as follows:—

_First._—Does what you have thought of belong to the animal or
vegetable kingdom?

_Answer._—To the vegetable.

_Second._—Is it manufactured, or unmanufactured?

_Answer._—Manufactured.

_Third._—Is it a solid, or a liquid?

_Answer._—A solid.

_Fourth._—Is it a thing entire in itself, or in parts?

_Answer._—Entire.

_Fifth._—Is it for private use, or public?

_Answer._—Public.

_Sixth._—Does it exist in England, or out of it?

_Answer._—In England.

_Seventh._—Is it single, or are there others of the same kind?

_Answer._—Single.

_Eighth._—Is it historical, or only existent at present?

_Answer._—Both.

_Ninth._—For ornament, or use?

_Answer._—Both.

_Tenth._—Has it any connection with the person of the king?

_Answer._—No.

_Eleventh._—Is it carried, or does it support itself?

_Answer._—The former.

_Twelfth._—Does it pass by succession? [Not answered, on account of
uncertainty; but, by agreement, the question was counted one in the
progress of the game.]

_Thirteenth._—Was it used at the coronation?

_Answer._—Yes.

_Fourteenth._—In the hall or abbey?

_Answer._—Probably, in both; certainly in the abbey.

_Fifteenth._—Does it belong specially to the coronation, or is it used
at other times?

_Answer._—It is used at other times.

_Sixteenth._—Is it exclusively of a vegetable nature, or is it not in
some parts a compound of a vegetable and a mineral?

_Answer._—Exclusively of a vegetable nature.

_Seventeenth._—What is its shape? [Objected to, as too particular;
withdrawn by the questioner and therefore not counted.]

_Seventeenth, repeated._—Is it decorated, or simple? [Objected to, but
objection not sustained.]

_Answer._—Simple.

_Eighteenth._—Is it used at the ordinary ceremonial of the House of
Commons or House of Lords?

_Answer._—No.

_Nineteenth._—Is it ever used by either House?

_Answer._—No.

_Twentieth._—Is it generally stationary, or movable?

_Answer._—Movable.

Answer, guessed correctly at the end of the twentieth question: “_The
wand of the Lord High Steward_.”


GAME OF PHOTOGRAPH.

ONE person is chosen to preside. He must see that each player is
provided with pencil and paper with which to write his replies to the
questions announced by the president. The questions are put in the
order here given, and the answers must be numbered to correspond with
the questions.

Questions.

1. What virtue do you most admire?

2. What vice do you most abhor?

3. Who is your favorite prose author?

4. Who is your favorite poet?

5. Who is your favorite poetess?

6. What book do you prefer?

7. What is your favorite amusement?

8. What is your favorite economy?

9. What is your favorite extravagance?

10. What is your favorite color?

11. What is your favorite hour?

12. What is your favorite art?

13. What is your favorite picture?

14. What is your favorite statue?

15. What is your favorite season?

16. What is your favorite flower?

17. What is your favorite aim of life?

18. Who is your favorite hero?

19. Who is your favorite heroine?

20. Which is your favorite summer resort?

21. What is your favorite weakness?

22. What is the sweetest word in the world?

23. What is the saddest word?

24. What is your favorite man’s name?

25. What is your favorite woman’s name?

26. What is your prevailing characteristic?

27. What is your favorite piece of music?

28. What is your favorite occupation?

29. Which do you prefer, wealth or a competency?

30. Which is your favorite animal?

When all the answers have been written, the papers are collected by the
President. No one is to see what answers have been written by any other
person. After shuffling them together, the President reads them aloud,
and each player guesses as to the authorship of each paper. Forfeits
are sometimes collected, and the game prolonged in that way. This game
cannot be well played except by persons who are well acquainted with
each other.


YORK AND LANCASTER, OR THE WAR OF THE ROSES.

THIS game is commenced by the choice of two Commanders, either by lot
or by vote. As it is necessary for the success of the game to select
the most skillful as the Commanders, each player should carefully
consider the merits of all the others before casting his vote. One
Commander is called Duke of York, and the other Duke of Lancaster. The
Commanders draw lots for the first choice of men, and each Duke selects
alternately a man from the players till the whole are drawn.

Each party marks out its fort by drawing semicircular lines; the forts
should be in line, twenty paces apart, and each of them sufficiently
large to hold easily one of the armies. Twenty paces in front of each
fort should be drawn a semicircle larger than the fort, which is called
the prison, the prisons and forts thus marking the four corners of a
square.

The two Dukes then draw lots to decide which shall commence the game.
If the Duke of York wins, he sends out one of his red-rose men, usually
a new player, who must run at least beyond the line of the prison
before he returns. As soon as he has started the other Duke sends out
one of his men to pursue, and, if possible, to touch the red-rose
runner before he can regain his own fort. If this is accomplished,
the successful runner returns to his fort, while the vanquished party
must go to the enemy’s prison, from which he cannot stir until some one
from his own side releases him, by touching him in spite of the enemy.
This is not an easy task, as in order to reach the enemy’s prison, the
player must pass by the enemy’s fort. It is allowable for the prisoner
to stretch his hand as far towards his rescuer as possible, but he must
keep his body within the bounds; and if several prisoners are taken, it
is sufficient for one to remain within the prison, while the rest, by
joining hands, make a chain towards the player who is trying to release
them. [The Commanders in the commencement of the game must decide if
they will allow this latter mode of escape.] When a rescue is thus
accomplished, both the prisoner and his rescuer return to their fort,
no one being allowed to touch them until they have reached then fort
and again started out.

But the game is not restricted to the two originally sent out. As soon
as either Duke sees one of his men pressed by an opponent, he sends out
a third, who is in his turn pursued by another from the opposing side;
each being allowed to touch any who have preceded, but none who have
left their fort after him. The war soon becomes exciting; prisoners are
made and released, the two Dukes watching the game, and rarely exposing
themselves, except in cases of emergency, but directing the whole
proceedings. The game is considered won, when one party has succeeded
in imprisoning the whole of the other side.

Much depends upon the Commanders, who sometimes, by a bold dash,
rescue the most important of their men, and thereby turn the fate of
the battle; or when the attention of the opposite side is occupied by
some hardly-contested struggle, send out a player who walks quietly
up to the prison, and without attracting the notice of the opposing
party, lets out a prisoner. No player is permitted to touch more than
one person until he has returned to his fort; when he can sally out
again, armed with fresh strength, like Antæus of old, who could not
be conquered at wrestling because whenever he touched the ground his
strength was renewed by his Mother Earth.


POST-OFFICE.

THIS family game is instructive as well as amusing. Each one present
writes a poem, anecdote, essay, or a letter to some person either
present or absent. The articles written should be concise and must in
all cases be original. Any one who chooses to do so can disguise his
handwriting. The papers, as they are completed, are carefully folded
and directed, and then deposited in a covered box placed on the table.

The post-master must be chosen by the company. He has the right to open
all the letters and papers, first announcing to whom each is directed,
and reads them aloud. After the reading, the papers are distributed
according to the directions written upon them.

Young people who write for the “family portfolio” soon become very much
interested in it, and find themselves acquiring a ready use of the pen.


HANDWRITING UPON THE WALL.

CUT the word or words to be shown, out of a thick card or pasteboard;
place it before a lighted lamp, and the writing will be distinctly seen
upon the wall of the room.


GRACES.

THIS also is an old game, but should be revived, as it is as beneficial
as many of the exercises in the gymnasium, and quite as _graceful_. It
is of German origin, and can be played in the open air, or in any hall
or long room.

[Illustration]

To play the game you need four smooth, round sticks nearly
three-quarters of a yard long. The stick at one end should be just
large enough to be grasped firmly by the hand, and should be tapered
gradually to the end. These sticks, or grace wands, may be prettily
painted and wound near the large end, where they are held, with fancy
ribbons. The hoops are from ten to twelve inches in diameter, made of
some light wood, as bamboo, covered with bright colored silks and wound
with silver cord or some tinsel chenille.

The game is usually played by only two players, each taking two wands
and one hoop, and standing at a distance from each other; the two
wands are held in the hands across each other like open scissors. The
object is to throw and catch the hoop upon these wands. When trying to
catch the hoop the sticks are held like scissors shut, and are opened
apart when the hoop is thrown from you. If you can crown your opponent
without her catching the hoop, a kiss is the old-established forfeit.
The object of the game, as in “Shuttlecock and Battledoor,” is to keep
both hoops flying without once touching the floor. Beginners had better
first play with only one hoop.


FAMILY NEWSPAPER.

THIS is an excellent pastime for a large family, or several families
can unite in it. Choose the most ready writer, and the person of the
best judgment among your number, for the editor. He must also be a good
penman. Your paper can be a weekly or a monthly journal as you please.
Every member of the family must contribute one or more articles for the
paper, either serious, laughable, instructive or absurd pieces, and
give to the editor in season for him to arrange his paper, and publish
it at the appointed time. Such as wish to conceal their authorship must
notify the editor, and he is bound in honor not to reveal the name of
any writer without his permission. Large sheets can be procured, or two
or more small ones can be used together. The paper can then be read
aloud to the family, or each can read it separately. The family paper
will be found to add another link to the home chain. All the papers
thus prepared should be carefully preserved, and in after years they
will prove a source of pleasure. Most vividly will they bring by-gone
days before you.

A friend of mine lately told me of a newspaper of this description,
edited by a nephew only eleven years of age. She said that its perfect
regularity and neatness were beautiful to see. He printed the whole
with a pen, and it was arranged in proper newspaper form. The leading
editorials first, followed by a letter from abroad, anecdotes, terrible
accidents, telegraph news, marriages, deaths, advertisements, etc.,
etc. He was one of a family of nine. Every member of the family wrote
for it, even a little girl of six wrote an anecdote about her pet lamb.

[Illustration]




Games of Memory.


FRENCH and English exercises of the memory, such as the following, may
serve to amuse some leisure hour. The first is entitled the “Grand
Panjandrum:”—“She went into the garden to cut a cabbage leaf to make
an apple pie; and at the same time a great she-bear coming up the
street pops its head into the shop. ‘What! no soap?’ So he died, and
she very imprudently married the barber; and there were present the
Picininnies, and the Joblillies, and the Gurgulies, and the great
Panjandrum himself, with the little round button at top; and they all
fell to playing the game of ‘catch as catch can,’ till the gunpowder
ran out at the heels of their boots.”

  “Peter Piper picked a peck of pickled peppers,
  A peck of pickled peppers Peter Piper picked;
  If Peter Piper picked a peck of pickled peppers,
  Where is the peck of pickled peppers Peter Piper picked?”

  “When a twister twisting would twist him a twist,
  For twisting his twist three twists he will twist;
  But if one of his twists untwists from the twist,
  The twist untwisting untwists the twist.”

  “Didon dina, dit on, du dos d’un dodu dindon.”

  “Robert Rowley rolled a round roll round;
  A round roll Robert Rowley rolled round;
  Where rolled the round roll Robert Rowley rolled round?”

A FRENCHMAN having taken herb tea for a cough, his neighbor asked him,
“Ton Thè, t’a t’il otè ta toux?”


“LE JARDIN DE MA TANTE.”

LE vient du jardin de ma tante. O, qu’il est beau le jardin de ma
tante! Dans le jardin de ma tante, il y a un arbre. O, qu’il est beau
l’arbre du jardin de ma tante! Dans l’arbre du jardin de ma tante, il y
a un trou. O, qu’il est beau le trou, de l’arbre du jardin de ma tante!
Dans le trou, de l’arbre, du jardin, de ma tante, il y a un nid. O,
qu’il est beau le nid, du trou, de l’arbre, du jardin de ma tante! Dans
la nid, du trou, de l’arbre, du jardin, de ma tante, il y a un oiseau.
O, qu’il est beau l’oiseau du nid, du trou, de l’arbre, du jardin, de
ma tante!

L’oiseau du nid, du trou, de l’arbre, du jardin, de ma tante, porte
dans son bec un billet, ou ces mots sont écrits:—“Je vous aime,” O,
qu’ils sont doux ces mots, “Je vous aime,” qui sont écrits sur le
billet porté dans le bec, de l’oiseau, du nid, du trou, de l’arbre, du
jardin, de ma tante.


A GOOD FAT HEN.

1. A GOOD fat hen.

2. Two ducks and one good fat hen.

3. Three squalling wild geese, two ducks, and one good fat hen.

4. Four plump partridges, three squalling wild geese, two ducks, and
one good fat hen.

5. Five hundred Limerick oysters, four plump partridges, three
squalling wild geese, two ducks, and one good fat hen.

6. Six pairs of Don Alphonso’s tweezers, five hundred Limerick oysters,
four plump partridges, three squalling wild geese, two ducks, and one
good fat hen.

7. Seven hundred Macedonian horsemen drawn up in line of battle, six
pairs of Don Alphonso’s tweezers, five hundred Limerick oysters, four
plump partridges, three squalling wild geese, two ducks, and one good
fat hen.

8. Eight cages of Heliogabulus sparrowkites, seven hundred Macedonian
horsemen drawn up in line of battle, six pairs of Don Alphonso’s
tweezers, five hundred Limerick oysters, four plump partridges, three
squalling wild geese, two ducks, and one good fat hen.

9. Nine sympathetic, epithetic, didactic propositions, eight cages of
Heliogabulus sparrowkites, seven hundred Macedonian horsemen drawn up
in line of battle, six pairs of Don Alphonso’s tweezers, five hundred
Limerick oysters, four plump partridges, three squalling wild geese,
two ducks, and one good fat hen.

10. Ten helioscopic, peroscopic, pharmaceutical tubes, nine
sympathetic, epithetic, didactic propositions, eight cages of
Heliogabulus sparrowkites, seven hundred Macedonian horsemen drawn up
in line of battle, six pairs of Don Alphonso’s tweezers, five hundred
Limerick oysters, four plump partridges, three squalling wild geese,
two ducks, and one good fat hen

11. Eleven flat bottomed fly boats floating from Madagascar to
Mount Prunello, ten helioscopic, peroscopic, pharmaceutical tubes,
nine sympathetic, epithetic, didactic propositions, eight cages of
Heliogabulus sparrowkites, seven hundred Macedonian horsemen drawn up
in line of battle, six pairs of Don Alphonso’s tweezers, five hundred
Limerick oysters, four plump partridges, three squalling wild geese,
two ducks, and one good fat hen.

12. Twelve European dancing masters sent to Egypt to teach the
Egyptian mummies to dance and sing, eleven flat bottomed fly boats
floating from Madagascar to Mount Prunello, ten helioscopic,
peroscopic, pharmaceutical tubes, nine sympathetic, epithetic,
didactic propositions, eight cages of Heliogabulus sparrowkites, seven
hundred Macedonian horsemen drawn up in line of battle, six pairs of
Don Alphonso’s tweezers, five hundred Limerick oysters, four plump
partridges, three squalling wild geese, two ducks, and one good fat hen.

[Illustration: “CAN’T REMEMBER.”]




Parlor Games.


SQUAILS is a modern English game. The incompleteness of the original
rules, and the ridiculous terms employed in the game have prejudiced
many sensible people against it. Relieved of these absurdities, the
game is an interesting one.

Materials.

The materials for this game consist of sixteen squails, a target, and
a gauge. The squails are small discs of wood, about two inches in
diameter, eight of light and eight of dark colored wood. The squails
are designated by four distinct colors—two light and two dark of each
color. The target is of ivory, about one inch in diameter, and loaded
so as not to be easily moved or overturned. The gauge is a measure
three inches long, made with a convenient handle.

The method of the game is as follows: The company being seated around
a dining table, the squails are distributed to them, and the target
placed in the center of the table. Now the object of each player is
to drive his squails as near the target as possible, by allowing the
squail to project over the side of the table about one-fourth its size,
and striking it with the palm of the hand.

[Illustration]

Vocabulary of Terms.

TARGET.—The movable hub at which the squails are played.

GAUGE.—The measure.

LINE OF DEMARCATION.—An imaginary line round the table, at the
distance of the length of the gauge from the edge.

OUT.—A squail struck over the line of demarcation on the opposite side
from the player striking it, is “out.”

TO ROUT.—To strike a collection of enemy’s squails so as to scatter
them about.

TO BLOCKADE.—To leave one’s squails in such a position as to block up
a passage in which the next hostile player could play to advantage.

TO CUT OUT.—To leave one’s squails between the target, a hostile
squail lying near it.

Rules.

The game of squails may be played by any number of persons not
exceeding eight. If the number of players is even, half will play on
one side and half on the other—one side taking the light squails and
the other the dark ones. The players of the opposing sides must be
seated alternately round the table. If there is an uneven number of
players, there are no sides, and all are antagonistic to each other.

A captain is chosen on each side, to whom the players may look for
advice, and who shall decide the amount to be scored at each round.

The first play, if there are sides, is determined by the two captains
playing one squail each at the target, the one who drives his squail
nearest to the target having the first play. If an odd number
play, each one plays in a like manner for the lead. The lead being
determined, the commencing player places one of his squails about one
quarter off the edge of the table, and strikes it with the palm of his
hand, aiming at the target which is in the center of the table. The
squails slide on the surface of the table.

The players must play one at a time in rotation, with the course of the
sun—i. e. from right to left. When all the squails have been played a
round is finished, and the nearest squail to the target counts one if
within the distance of the gauge. If more than one of the same side are
nearer than any of the other color, they all count one each, provided
they are within the distance of the length of the gauge—i. e. three
inches. A player can strike his squail from any position around the
table which he can reach without moving from his chair, or rising from
his seat.

If the target is moved by a squail from its place, and does not cross
the line of demarcation, it must remain where it stops, unless it is
rolling and unsteady; in which case the next player can stand it firmly
in the place where he finds it, and all must play at it in its new
position till that round is finished. Before commencing a new round the
target must be placed back to the center of the table.

At the end of a round, the captain of one side makes his claim for
so many “in,” and if the claim is disputed, the gauge is used by the
disputing captain to measure the distance from the target to the
disputed squails. If the captain of the side who claims one or more
squails “in” at the conclusion of the round touches them before they
have been allowed by the captain of the opposition, the squail or
squails so touched are null, and do not count towards the game. The
winner of one round begins the next.

If the target is struck across the line of demarcation, i. e. “out,” it
terminates that round; the person who sent it out commences the next
round, and one is added to the score of the adversary.

The game can consist of any number agreed upon by the players. Five is
a short game, and eleven is a long one.

A squail having been struck so far on the table as not to be touched
by the gauge, measuring from the edge of the table, is considered as
played, and cannot be taken back. It is then said to have passed the
line of demarcation. If a squail passes the line of demarcation twice,
i. e. goes across the table, one of the opposing side must cry, “That
squail is out,” before the next squail in succession has been played,
otherwise, the owner may claim it, and play it again at the conclusion
of the round. If more than one squail is “out,” and not cried, they may
all be claimed and played at the end of the round in the order in which
they were “out.”


PARLOR OR CARPET BOWLS.

THE materials of this game are one white ball, and a number of other
balls, designated by four distinct colors. It is played as follows:
Place the white ball on the floor near one end of the room with perhaps
a row of books behind it, to protect the finish.

[Illustration]

Divide the remaining balls equally among the players, or give an equal
number of balls to each player. If four play, it is more interesting
to form sides, the two players on one side taking the dark balls, and
the other two the light ones. Blue and black are considered dark—red
and yellow, light. The players, retiring to some part of the room more
or less distant from the white ball, now bowl the colored balls, which
they hold, at the white one, by turns. Each player bowls one ball at a
time, the play passing around the company as many times as there are
colored balls for each player. The first bowl goes by turn, as the last
bowl is the most valuable. The object of each player is to have the
balls that he bowls rest as near as possible to the white one, and
also to drive his enemy’s balls away from the white one, or the white
one away from them. When all the balls have been bowled, the ball that
lies nearest the white one counts 4; the one next nearest, 2; and the
third nearest, 1—to the person or side to which they belong. Thus, we
will suppose that of the three balls lying nearest to the white ball,
the nearest one belongs to the dark side, and the two next nearest
belong to the light side. Then the dark side scores 4, and the light
side 2 and 1, making 3. But if the _three_ nearest balls had belonged
to the dark side, they would have scored 7, and the light side nothing.
The game may be 20, or any other number agreed upon by the players
before commencing, and the player or side that gains that number first
wins the game. Should the game be nearly equal, so that both sides gain
20 in the same hand, then the side that makes the greatest number wins.
The white ball must remain wherever it is rolled by the playing of the
balls during each hand and placed back on some designated spot at the
_commencement_ of each hand. If two balls belonging to opposite parties
are equally distant from the white ball, it is a tie, and the two
players who bowled those balls must try again, and the one whose ball
is nearest will count 4, the other 3.


THE UNION GAME, OR RED, WHITE AND BLUE.

THIS is an excellent parlor game. Any person possessing a croquet
board, by taking out the hoops, can use it for the Union game, although
a square or round board is better; if square, the board should measure
from three and a half to four feet each way; if round, from three and a
half to four feet in diameter. The board should be firmly made of well
seasoned wood, and covered with cloth or green baize. It should have a
rim or fence around the edge, just sufficient to prevent the balls from
rolling off the board. It is necessary to have three cubes made of some
light wood, about an inch and a half each way; one should be painted
red, one white, and one blue, with a star on each face.

Each player should have three balls, painted red, white and blue, and a
mallet. The balls and mallets may be the same used in parlor croquet.
If this game is played on a board, it is necessary, in order to avoid
any disputes, to have a square marked in the centre in which to place
the cubes. A croquet board can be adapted to the game by removing the
central hoop.

All persons, who prefer not to use a board, can play the game on the
floor, by placing the cubes on some central figure of the carpet. By
using larger blocks and the croquet balls and mallets, this game can be
played on a level spot of ground, in the open air.

How the Game is to be Played.

Place the red cube in the centre of the board, the white diagonally on
top of the red, and on top of the white place the blue cube, with its
sides square with the red. The person to commence the game is chosen by
lot. He places his red ball at the distance of a mallet’s head from the
edge of the board, and tries to send his ball against the cubes in the
centre; he can roll his three balls in succession, and at the end of
his play take back his balls and replace the cubes, if their position
has been changed by his play. The player on his left then plays his
three balls, and each in turn, until all have played. The same thing is
repeated until three rounds have been played.

Rules of the Game.

1. Each player must play from the place he first selects, and at the
same distance from the cubes as the other players, or forfeit his play.

2. If a player with his red ball throws down the blue and white cubes
and moves the red cube over the square marked, it counts him 20, and
he need not play the white or blue ball, but whatever points he wins
during the second round with the first two balls counts on the first
roll.

3. If a player only throws down the blue and white cubes without moving
the red from its square, he counts 15.

4. If a player only knocks off the blue cube, he counts 10.

5. If a player only moves the three cubes, he counts 5.

6. If a player with the first two balls throws down two cubes and moves
the under red cube, his play is finished for that round, and when his
next turn comes, he can add what he wins with the first ball to the
count on his former play.

7. If a player knocks the three cubes down in the three rolls, he
counts 20, and if he only knocks down two in three rolls without moving
the red, he counts 15; if only the blue cube he counts 10; if he merely
moves them all together he counts 5 for the three balls; if he hits
them but does not move them he counts nothing.

8. If in rolling the three balls at the cubes he misses them every
time, he loses 5 from his score.

One of the company should be provided with pencil and paper and keep an
accurate account of each player’s score.


ZOETROPE, OR WHEEL OF LIFE.

THE Zoetrope is a newly invented toy. It presents a series of striking
optical delusions, and is constructed in part on the principle of the
Phenakestoscope, though altogether different in its arrangement and
effect. It can be exhibited on a table in the middle of a room, and a
dozen or more can be amused by it at the same time, one of the party
keeping it in motion. The exhibitor can give such description of the
pictures as they appear as he thinks best. A bright boy or girl can
add very much to the interest of the exhibition by witty descriptions.
The exhibitor can announce his performance to a family party in a
high-flown handbill, charge an admission fee to the room, and carry out
the exhibition in the most approved style. The toy is admirably adapted
for the entertainment of children.

[Illustration]


GRECIAN GAMES.

IN reading an account of the toys, sports and pastimes of the ancient
Greeks, one is surprised at their resemblance to our own. They had
many games now in common use, and supposed to be of modern invention. A
Grecian philosopher named Archytas invented the child’s rattle.

Our children would like to revive the hoops of the ancient Greeks. They
surely were more tasteful than ours. I will describe them, and perhaps
some enterprising boy will try to imitate, if not surpass them. They
were made of bronze, three feet in diameter, very light, and adorned
with little spherical bells and movable rings, which jingled musically
as the hoops rolled along; the hoop stick was crooked at the point, and
called a “plectron.”

Boys! do not be outdone by the young Greeks. Try and invent a hoop with
bells of different tones, that will play a melody as it rolls. Some
iron hoops have bells, but they are not musical. The Egyptians, too,
excelled in toys of all kinds.


JACK-STRAWS.

JACK-STRAWS were played centuries ago, and like many other good old
games, have come into fashion anew and with some improvements. The
game may be played with straws or fine splinters of wood, four or five
inches in length. The straws are gathered in a bunch, not tied, but
held firmly together by one end of the bunch, in the hand, a few inches
above the table. Held in this manner the bunch will be spread at the
bottom, somewhat in the form of a haystack. The player suddenly drops
the bunch, and the straws fall in an irregular heap on the table. Each
player is provided with a straw or stick, on one end of which a small
hook or crooked pin is made fast, and each in turn tries to draw with
his hook a single straw from the heap without moving in the slightest
degree, any straw except the one he seeks to remove. If he succeeds,
he keeps the straw, and proceeds to draw out another or others, but
whenever he disturbs any other than the one straw he gives up his turn
to his opponent. The one who gains the largest number of straws wins
the game.

The jack-straws sold in the toy shops are usually made of wood, and
each bunch contains pieces roughly representing kings, queens, bishops,
&c. Each of these pieces has a number marked on it, and when one of
them is drawn from the heap, it counts for the player as many straws as
its number indicates. If the players so agree, each can gather up the
straws, as often as his turn comes, and drop them anew.

[Illustration: JACK-STRAWS.]




Games for Little Children.


DANCE, THUMBKIN, DANCE! is a game by which an older person can amuse
a number of little children. It is played by holding up the hand and
bending thumb and fingers in the following manner. First, put the
thumb in motion, singing in a lively tune, “Dance, thumbkin, dance;”
then keep the thumb still and move the four fingers, singing, “Dance,
ye merry men, every one, for thumbkin he can dance alone.” Then move
the forefinger and sing, “Dance, foreman, dance!” Then move all the
fingers, singing, “Dance, ye merry men, every one, for foreman he can
dance alone.” Then keep the second finger in motion, singing, “Dance,
middleman, dance!” Then move all the fingers, singing, “Dance, ye
merry men, every one, for middleman he can dance alone.” Then in the
same manner repeat the process with the two other fingers, calling the
third finger “ring-man,” and the fourth finger “little-man.” When these
changes are done rapidly, it entertains even babies.


UNCLE JOHN.

ALL the children who join this game must stand in a circle holding each
others’ hands, and as they walk or dance around they sing the following
words:

  “Uncle John is very sick. What shall we send him?
  A piece of pie, a piece of cake, a piece of apple dumpling.
  What shall we send it in? In a golden saucer.
  Who shall we send it by? By the king’s daughter.
  D-o-w-n, down.”

Then all must kneel down as quickly as possible, and rise up at once,
the one who is the last to kneel must, when they all rise, whisper to
some one a girl’s or boy’s name, and then all join in the circle, the
one who knelt last facing outwards. Then they all repeat as follows,
making use of the name whispered:

  “J—— B—— so they say
  Goes a courting night and day,
  Sword and pistol by his side,
  M—— L—— shall be his bride,
  She has sparks, one, two, three,
  I can tell you who they be,
  Joel, Toel, half a day,
  Exel, Toel, turn away.”

All again commence to sing “Uncle John is very sick,” &c., this
continues until each one faces outwards in turn or they are weary of it.


MOTHER GOOSE.

THIS is a new and amusing game for little children. One among their
number must be chosen to take the part of “Mother Goose,” and she must
arrange her forces in a line, and place a cricket in the centre of
the room. She then leads off, clapping her hands and dancing slowly,
saying, “Hi, diddle, diddle, the cat’s in the fiddle.” All must
follow her, saying and acting exactly as she does, on penalty of a
forfeit. She then imitates the mewing of a cat and all imitate her.
She then repeats “the cow jumped over the moon,” and “Mother Goose”
runs and jumps over the cricket, all the others following her. Again
they pass round the room singing, “The little dog laughed to see the
sport.” Suddenly she stops and laughs heartily, each one imitating her,
and away they go again, singing, “The dish ran away with the spoon.”
“Mother Goose” then claps her hands as a signal for all to run, and off
they start, she after them; if she succeeds in catching one, she cries
out, “Here is Mother Goose,” and all assemble round her, and the play
commences again. If played in the open air, it is well to have some
post or tree as a goal, and if “Mother Goose” does not catch some one
before it is reached, she has to act her part again.


“CLAP OUT AND CLAP IN.”

ALL the girls in the party arrange themselves behind chairs, sofas,
ottomans, &c., all the boys being sent out of the room, one girl stands
as door-keeper. Some girl then calls out the name of a boy whom she
wishes to take the seat in front of her, the door-keeper opens the door
and calls out the name. The boy called enters and the door is shut;
he looks all around wondering who has chosen him, and finally takes a
seat. If he happens to sit down in front of the girl who called his
name she kisses him, and he keeps his seat; but if not, as is most
likely to be the case, they all clap him out, and away he goes. Another
is then chosen and the same thing is gone through; sometimes a favorite
boy will be called in a number of times before he guesses correctly.
When all the girls have taken their turn in calling, they leave the
room, and the boys take their stand behind the seats, and the girls are
called in.


FINGERS AND THUMBS.

[Illustration:

One finger one thumb keep moving, One finger one thumb

keep moving, One finger one thumb keep moving, Gee

up, Ge I, Ge O, Two fingers one thumb keep moving, &c.]

 Three [fingers, one thumb,] keep moving. Three, &c.

 Four [fingers, one thumb,] keep moving. Four, &c.

 Five [fingers, one thumb,] keep moving. Five, &c.

 Six [fingers, one thumb,] keep moving. Six, &c.

 Seven [fingers, one thumb,] keep moving. Seven, &c.

 Eight [fingers, one thumb,] keep moving. Eight, &c.

 Eight [fingers, two thumbs,] keep moving. Eight, &c.

 Eight [fingers, two thumbs and one arm,] keep moving. Eight, &c.

 Eight [fingers, two thumbs and two arms,] keep moving. Eight, &c.

 Eight [fingers, two thumbs, two arms and one foot,] keep moving.
 Eight, &c.

 Eight [fingers, two thumbs, two arms, and two feet,] keep moving.
 Eight, &c.

 Eight [fingers, two thumbs, two arms, two feet, and your head,] keep
 moving. Eight, &c.

The words in brackets must be sung on one note, as in chants; and each
line must be repeated three times, as arranged under the above notes.
The person selected to commence this game must arrange all the players
in a circle, either seated or standing as he directs. Each must follow
the motions of the leader, and join him in singing. When the leader is
ready to commence the game he must clap his hands. He then begins to
move his fore-finger and thumb, and sings the words as arranged at the
beginning of these directions. All the motions he makes must correspond
with the words he sings, and each player must imitate his motions, and
continue them through the game. All the fingers, thumbs, arms, feet and
heads in the room will soon be in motion. The effect of this game is
quite laughable. The persons joining in this play can recite the words
without singing, if they prefer.


“YOU ARE NOTHING BUT A GOOSE.”

THIS play consists in telling a story for the amusement of little
children, and at the same time drawing figures on a slate or paper in
illustration of it. For instance, “An old man and his wife lived in
a little cabin. I will draw it with my pencil, so that you may know
it. There it is, (here make a picture of the cabin.) This cabin had
a window, which I will make thus, (here put in the window.) Near the
window was a projecting door, like this, (here put in the door.) On the
side opposite the door was a road, bordered on one side by a hedge,
(draw the road and hedge.) This road terminated in a large pond, (mark
out the pond,) and herbs grew round it, (mark them.) One night some
robbers came to the further end of the pond, (make some marks for
robbers.) The old woman heard them and told her husband to get up and
see what was the matter. The old people walked down to the side of the
pond, (make marks for the old people on the side of the pond.) Each
of them held out a hand to caution the other to keep silence, (mark
the hands.) But they did not hear anything, for the robbers had taken
fright and had run away. After standing out in the cold for a long
time, the old man said to his wife, ‘Go along back to the house, you
are nothing but a goose.’ At this point you hold up your paper and it
will be seen that you have made a picture of a goose. The subjoined cut
illustrates the progress of the picture.”

[Illustration]

While telling the story you must be careful that the lookers-on see the
growing picture sideways, or upside down; otherwise they may suspect
your design before the picture is complete. Other simple stories can be
illustrated in like manner.


BUZZ.

PROMPTNESS is very necessary in this game. Any number of children
excepting seven, both girls and boys, seat themselves round a table,
or in a circle. One begins the game by saying, “One!” the child on the
left says “two!” so on till they come to seven, which number must not
be mentioned, but in place thereof the word “Buzz!” Whenever a number
occurs in which the figure seven is used or any number into which seven
may be multiplied, “Buzz” must be used instead of that number. Such
are the numbers, 7, 14, 17, 21, 27, 28, 35, 37, 42, &c., &c. Any one
mentioning a number with seven in it instead of “Buzz,” or calling out
of turn, or naming a wrong number, must pay a forfeit. After she has
paid her forfeit, she calls out, “One!” and so it goes round again
to the left. When by a little practice the circle gets as high as
seventy-one, then, “Buzz one,” “Buzz two,” &c., must be used, and for
seventy-seven, “Buzz-Buzz,” and so on. If the person whose turn it is
to speak delays longer than while any one of the circle can moderately
count five, she must pay a forfeit.


THE PUZZLE WALL.

[Illustration: FIGURE ONE.]

[Illustration: FIGURE TWO.]

SUPPOSE there was a pond, around which four poor men build their
houses, as in figure one. Suppose four wicked rich men afterward built
houses around the poor people, as in figure two, and wished to have all
the water of the pond to themselves. How could they build a high wall,
so as to shut out the poor people from the pond? You might try on your
slate a great while and not do it. I will show you:

[Illustration]


DOLLS.

GIVE your girls a number of substantial dolls to play with, and pieces
of cotton cloth, calico or muslin-delaine, ribbons, &c., with which to
make dresses; and do not buy elegantly dressed dolls, which can only be
used on great occasions. I will tell you how a little girl I once knew
played dolls. Her first doll was a “rag baby” that her aunt made and
dressed for her, like a real child. She had even a night-dress and cap.
She would amuse herself by hours together, dressing, undressing and
singing it to sleep; she would have it in her arms every night. As she
grew older she carefully treasured all bits of finery, and everything
she could manufacture into clothing for her doll. A little girl lived
near and they used to visit daily with their dolls. Christmas always
added to their treasures, and they finally concluded to join forces
and commence a baby-house on a large scale in a spare room. They had
a parlor, dining-room, bed-rooms, kitchen and pantry, all completely
furnished, and a dozen nice dolls. Every leisure moment was spent in
this baby-house. They had regular washings and ironings. They had
little tubs and flat-irons of their own. They baked bread, cookies and
ginger-cakes, for their mother’s cook would good-naturedly show them
how to mix and make wee bits of loaves. A thimble was often used as a
cookie or biscuit cutter.

Such plays give girls a taste for domestic employments, and aid them in
becoming good housekeepers, and good housekeeping is always a desirable
and sometimes a very necessary accomplishment.

They would often “play school,” and in asking questions, and answering
for their dolls, the lessons they were taught at school, were more
firmly impressed on their minds.

If they had birthday parties, company was always invited at two; and
their “party” (that is, refreshments,) were served at half-past four in
Winter, and five in Summer. Beaux they did not think of. If little boys
joined them, they were their playmates, and no more. They always took
their dolls, and after playing simple games they would resort to them
as their chief amusement.


BOYS.

IF boys desire a hammer, nails, boards, &c., do not deny them. When
a baby girl commences to play with a doll, a baby boy will pound, or
pretend to hammer nails, or drive horses. It is useless to attempt to
make boys love quiet sports. Set aside some spare spot in your house,
where the noise will not disturb your household, or, what is better,
build a little work-room especially for their use. It will be money
well invested. Thus by early cultivating their tastes and by giving
them employment, seed may be sown which will yield an abundant harvest.

Mothers! do not, by yielding to your over-sensitive nerves, stupefy
your boys. If they are good for anything, they must and will make a
noise. It is better to let them have a place of their own, but you
should frequently inspect their work or play, and let them see you are
interested in all they do. If they make you a flower frame, praise it,
and if they show a taste for mechanics suggest to them other useful
articles to be constructed, such as boxes, silk-winders, &c. When
you make presents give them tools. Encourage them also by judicious
rewards, to keep their room neat and their tools in order.

The following simple directions for making a few useful articles may be
of service to boys who like to exercise their mechanical ingenuity.

Flower Frames.

Simple frames are made by taking two long narrow strips of wood and
several small ones of different lengths, and nailing the latter to
the long ones at equal distances apart, or a still better way is to
make holes in the long strips and insert the ends of the short ones.
When they are finished paint them green. These frames can be made in
the form of a partly opened fan. A square frame can easily be made.
The prettiest frames are made of willows, wire, or rattans. Take
strips of wood and burn or bore holes through them at equal distances.
Then insert the wire, or rattan, or willow, and twist them around in
different forms, fastening the ends firm; then paint or varnish them.

Boxes.

Pretty boxes can be made of any common wood, by simply staining them
with asphaltum varnish. Then varnish with several coats of copal.
After they are well dried, take some pumice-stone and polish them. If
necessary, varnish carefully once again. Your common pine wood will
then be turned into black walnut, highly polished. Picture frames,
brackets, little book-racks, stands, crickets, and even sleds and
wagons can easily be made by an ingenious boy, and stained in this
manner or painted. Your sisters can ornament them with leather work
made to imitate carved wood. If you are puzzled in making any of these
articles, go to any workshop and the workmen will tell you how to make
them, if you speak properly to them. Never say, my dear boys, you have
nothing to do.


PLAY-GROUND RHYMES.

THESE are used by boys and girls in selecting the leaders of their
games, instead of drawing lots. The following rhymes are in common use:

  One is all, two is all,
    Zick is all, zan;
  Bob-tail vinegar,
    Tickle ’em, tan.
      Harum-scarum,
      Virginia Marum,
    Tee-taw-buck.

  Little boy driving cattle,
  Don’t you hear his money rattle?
    One, two, three—out goes he.

  Aina, maina, ickery on
  Feelsa, folsa, Nicholas John
  Quever, quaver, English naver,
  Stingum, stangum, jollo buck.

  Aina, maina, mona, mike,
  Barcelona, bona, strike;
  Airy, wairy, dina, snack,
  Harico, barico, wee, wa, wack.

  One-ry, two-ry, dis-cum dary,
  Hackibo, crackibo, Henry Lary;
  Dis-cum dandy, American time,
  Humelum, jumelum, twenty-nine.

  Hitum, titum, little Kitty,
  Hop-um, skip-um, jumpey daily;
  Roly, poly, dilly, dally,
  He, hi, ho, diddle-dum buck.

  Lo-po, hi, do, de, ti, to, tu,
  Hany, wany, zany zan, you’re the man.


FORFEITS.

A GREAT many games for children and older persons end in forfeits. A
few hints in regard to them may be of service. It is very foolish for
any one to join a game unless he is willing to forget himself for the
time, and join heartily in it. The game of forfeits, if well played,
is amusing to old and young. Every one should be willing to redeem his
or her forfeit without stopping to think whether it is foolish or not.
A good, hearty laugh is healthful, and every sensible person ought to
be willing to take his turn in amusing the company. A whole game may
be ruined by the absurd actions of some one who foolishly refuses to
redeem his forfeit, for fear of lowering his dignity or making himself
ridiculous.

In choosing a judge of forfeits, it is necessary to select a person of
quick perceptions and ready wit. The judge must be prompt in giving his
decisions, and they who redeem their forfeits must be as expeditious
as possible. Promptness is necessary to the success of all games. The
following list of forfeits, collected from various sources, may assist
the judge:

Let the judge give out a line with which the one who owns the forfeit
shall make another line to rhyme, no matter how absurdly.

Laugh first, sing next, then cry, and lastly whistle.

Place your hands behind you and guess who touches them; you are not to
redeem your forfeit till you guess right.

Stand with your heels and back close to the wall, then stoop without
moving your feet, and pick up the forfeit.

Say “Quizzical, quiz, kiss me quick,” nine times without a mistake.

Ask the person who owns the forfeit, what musical instrument he likes
best; then require him to give an imitation of it.

Ask the person what animal he likes best; then require him to imitate
it, either by action or sound.

If a gentleman, he must put on a lady’s bonnet, and imitate the
voice and manner of the lady to whom it belongs. If a lady, then she
must take a gentleman’s hat and imitate his manner, (sometimes these
imitations are very humorous. The use of some word or expression
habitually employed by the person imitated adds largely to the sport.)

Go to service; apply to the person who holds the forfeit for a place
as maid of all work. The questions then to be asked are: “How do you
wash?” “How do you iron?” “How do you make a bed?” “How do you scrub
the floor?” “How do you clean knives and forks?” &c. The whole of
these processes must be imitated by motions, and if the replies are
satisfactory the forfeit must be given up.

Put two chairs back to back, take off your boots or shoes and jump over
them. (The fun consists in a mistaken idea that the chairs are to be
jumped over instead of the shoes.)

  It is said there is a person you have loved since a boy,
  Whose hand you must kiss ere I give you this toy,
  It is not your father, or mother, or sister,
  Nor cousin, nor friend, take care not to miss, sir.

  [_Himself._]

Make a low courtesy to each one in the room: if it is a gentleman, he
must make a bow.

Recite several of Mother Goose’s melodies.

Make wry faces at every person in the room.

Admire yourself in the mirror.

Shiver and act the part of a person half frozen, or pretend to be
nearly suffocated with heat.

Rush around the room and greet every one as if you had just arrived
from a long and dangerous voyage.

If a gentleman, act the part of a village orator; if a lady, act the
strong-minded woman.

(A gentleman’s and lady’s forfeit can be given together in many cases,
making it more amusing as well as expeditious.)

Sing a song or repeat some high-flown poetry.

Perform the laughing gamut without a pause or mistake:

                       ha!
                    ha!   ha!
                 ha!         ha!
              ha!               ha!
           ha!                     ha!
        ha!                           ha!
     ha!                                 ha!
  ha!                                       ha!

Keep silence and preserve a sober face for several minutes, without
regard to what may be said or done.

Kiss your shadow in every corner of the room without laughing.

Repeat, without mistake, any difficult sentence which the judge
appoints.

Say to each person in the room, “You can’t say boo to a goose.”

Tell the person to point out on a wall what he supposes to be the
height of an ordinary hat. If after measuring with a hat, he has (as is
rarely the case,) guessed right, he wins his forfeit; but if not, he or
she must wear the hat and bow or curtsy to every one in the room.

Yawn till you make several others yawn. (It is well to give this
forfeit to one of the male sex with a large mouth. A large circle of
people may be made to yawn by simply opening and closing the fingers
slowly.)

Two can redeem their forfeits in this way. They must stand in separate
corners of the room, each holding a lighted candle; one begins and
walks toward the other, with her handkerchief to her eyes, saying in a
most dismal tone, “The King of Morocco is dead! is dead!” The other in
passing by her, in the same attitude, sobs out, “Sad news! sad news!”
Again, in the same way, both exclaim, “Alas! alas!” All must be said
without laughing. The above penalty is often used as a game.

Place a candle on a table or piano. Then blindfold the person and
place him just three paces from it, and directly in front of the
light. Then he must whirl around three times, walk forward, and blow
out the candle. This is amusing. A room full of persons may try it
unsuccessfully. Being blinded, and then whirling around, bewilders one,
and he will very likely walk in an opposite direction, and perhaps blow
in some one’s face, feeling sure he is right.

A number of children may redeem their forfeits together, in this way:

  This is the way we wash our clothes,
                    Wash our clothes,
  So early Monday morning;
  This is the way we wash our clothes,
  So early Monday morning.

[_While singing this they must pretend to wash._]

  This is the way we rinse our clothes,
                    Rinse our clothes,
  So early Monday morning;
  This is the way we rinse our clothes,
  So early Monday morning.

[_With this verse they imitate rinsing, and with each verse they act
the words they sing._]

  This is the way we wring our clothes,
                    Wring our clothes,
  So early Monday morning;
  This is the way we wring our clothes,
  So early Monday morning.

  This is the way we hang out our clothes,
                Hang out our clothes,
  So early Monday morning;
  This is the way we hang out our clothes,
  So early Monday morning.

  This is the way we sprinkle our clothes,
                  Sprinkle our clothes,
  So early Monday evening;
  This is the way we sprinkle our clothes,
  So early Monday evening.

  This is the way we fold our clothes,
                    Fold our clothes,
  So early Monday evening;
  This is the way we fold our clothes,
  So early Monday evening.

  This is the way we starch our clothes,
                  Starch our clothes,
  So early Tuesday morning;
  This is the way we starch our clothes,
  So early Tuesday morning.

  This is the way we iron our clothes,
                  Iron our clothes,
  So early Tuesday morning;
  This is the way we iron our clothes,
  So early Tuesday morning.

This is a good game for young children.

[Illustration]




CONDENSED LIST OF

Games and Popular Amusements,

Manufactured and Published by

_MILTON BRADLEY & COMPANY,_

247 Main Street, Springfield, Mass.


We can guarantee that in the nature and method of our games nothing
will be found in the least objectionable to the most fastidious in such
matters, but on the contrary, they are all _moral_ and amusing, and
many of them very instructive in History, Literature, Business, &c., &c.

We have made social home amusements a specialty for several years, and
the extensive and rapidly increasing sales that our publications have
already attained throughout the country, is gratifying evidence of the
universal favor with which they have been received.

In this Catalogue we have not space to give even a brief description of
each, but append the ages of persons for which the several games are
best adapted, and the prices.

Those games marked thus * will be sent by mail on receipt of price. The
rest cannot be safely sent by mail.


The New England and National Games.

 CHECKERED GAME OF LIFE. Ages, 5 to 50. Price $1.00.

 CHECKERED GAME OF LIFE. _Extra_, with muslin board and album box;
 elegant for a present; same game as above. $2.00.

 *MODERN HIEROGLYPHICS. Three series; 10 and over. Each series 25
 cents. No. 3 is new and interesting.

 *PATRIOT HEROES; or, WHO’S TRAITOR? Historical, instructive, simple
 and amusing; 8 to 18. 60 cents.

 *AUTHORS IMPROVED. Instructive; 10 and over. 50 cents.

 *AUTHORS IMPROVED. _Extra, presentation edition_, in album box,
 superior cards, same game as above. $1.00.

 *WHAT IS IT? OR, THE WAY TO MAKE MONEY. Lively and social; a Business
 Educator; 15 and over. 60 cents.

 *DOMINO CARDS. Linen ivory board; 8 to 15. 25 cents.

 *RUSSIAN DOMINOES. Five games; 8 and over. 50 cents.

 *CHINESE AND OLD SANTA CLAUS PUZZLES. 4 to 10. 20 cents.

 *ALPHABETS BEWITCHED. Instructive; 4 to 20. 25 cents.

 THE UNION GAME. Including Checkered Game, Chess, Checkers and
 Backgammon; 5 and over. $1.00.

 MY GRANDFATHER’S GAMES. Standard; 5 to 15. 30 cents.

 *THE MYRIOPTICON. A Miniature Panorama, immensely popular with the
 boys; 7 to 12. $1.25.

 *DISSECTED PICTURES. Three pictures—Darkey going to mill, Minnie
 shaving her cat, Amy teaching her dog his letters; 5 to 12. 60 cents.

 DISSECTED PICTURES. Two pictures; 5 to 12. 50 cents.

 *CONTRABAND GYMNAST. Comical; 1 to 100. 20 cents.

 *ALPHABETICAL LOTTO. Instructive; 4 to 12. 25 cents.

 *CURIOUS BIBLE QUESTIONS. Sunday School Cards; Reward Cards, Bible
 series; for Sunday Schools and the family. Per package, 10 cents.

 AMERICAN SQUAILS. Very popular; 8 to 100. $2.00. _Our American
 Squails have improved target_, and a common-sense set of rules, with
 respectable terms substituted for the disgusting terms used in the
 English game and its imitations in this country.

 THE CENTRIPETON. For one or a dozen; 1 to 75. $2.50.

 PARLOR CROQUET. From $10 to $50.

 PARLOR BOWLS. For all ages. $1.50, $2.00, $2.75.

 THE ZOETROPE; OR, WHEEL OF LIFE. Scientific; a big thing for a whole
 household. Two styles. $4.00, $5.00.

 *CROQUET. Its Principles and Rules, for Lawn and Parlor. Illustrated.
 The latest and standard rules. 25 cents.


_PARLOR CROQUET TABLES._

For _Parlor Croquet_, the _board_ or _table_ form is the only one
that is really practicable, as the floor game is too destructive to
furniture and finish.

Examine _Bradley’s Patent Parlor Croquet_, with Indexical Balls, Socket
Bridges, and Rubber Cushion, before purchasing the game. There are no
others so good for the same price.


_PARLOR BOWLS._

The best active family game for the price. Inferior in interest only to
Parlor Croquet. Our rules are original, and superior to any other rules
for Bowls.


_THE ZOETROPE, OR WHEEL OF LIFE._

No toy was ever invented that sold as rapidly, or afforded one-half the
amusement to young and old, as this.

It is constructed on PURELY SCIENTIFIC PRINCIPLES, and _the comical and
mirth-provoking effect is produced solely by_ OPTICAL ILLUSION.

_It needs only to be seen to be appreciated._


_LAWN CROQUET._

BRADLEY’S PATENT CROQUETERIES.

Our LAWN CROQUET has been acknowledged during the past season to be the
best in the market, either FOREIGN or DOMESTIC.

We manufacture under three U. S. Patents, which secure to us the
exclusive right to manufacture Croquet sets with _Indexical Balls_,
_Plated Bridges_, or _Socket Bridges_, and we shall sustain our rights
by legal force, if compelled to do so by continued infringements. In
addition to our patented improvements, we warrant every set, with our
stamp, to be of the best seasoned rock maple, and superior finish.


  Send for a Catalogue to
  MILTON BRADLEY & CO.,
  _Springfield, Mass._




BEZIQUE.


The Game of Bezique Complete,

PUBLISHED BY

OLNEY & PRATT,

_No. 41 John Street, New York_.


Of all Card games ever invented, this one is perhaps the most
interesting, if it is not the most scientific. It is especially a card
game for the family circle, and familiar gathering of friends, calling
out at once the interest, skill and social nature of its players. As a
card game among ladies, it has no rival in their admiration. Whether
the game was originated in the brilliant Court of Louis XIV., during
the last part of the sixteenth century, by a Duchess—and the term
Bezique has a personal signification relative to a singular marriage,
which occurred at that time, of a lady of the highest rank and great
beauty, to a Duke named Bezique—cannot be clearly affirmed, though
it is accounted so, and appears quite likely, when we consider that
the Knave card represented Dukes in the original game. Its origin is
accredited to other sources, but we give the above, as it is the only
account we have been able to gather that gives any explanation of the
word Bezique. This game has been revived in the last few years among
the French, with some alterations and additions, and has become a
favorite Card amusement in the fashionable circles of Paris life. In
the meantime it has been introduced in the United States, and, though
at present it is played only by the few in the higher circles of
society, it is rapidly making its popularity with all.

  Put up in Rosewood and Satinwood Cases, beautifully inlaid,
  making an elegant Holiday Present, retails at                 $10 00

  In handsome Colored Cloth Boxes, retails at                     5 00

  In Morocco Paper Boxes, gilt and very pretty, retails at        2 50


A Liberal Discount to the Trade.




OUR YOUNG FOLKS.


This Monthly, begun in January, 1865, has already won the reputation of
being “=the best Juvenile Magazine published in any land or language=.”
Prominent Educators, distinguished Clergymen of all denominations,
and the Press generally, have commended it in the highest terms.
Its contents are always thoroughly interesting and healthy, at once
variously attractive and useful.

The List of Contributors for 1867 will include, as heretofore, the
names of the most distinguished writers of the country, and the
Publishers will continue to rely for Illustrations upon the assistance
of the best Artists and Draughtsmen. Among the particular matters
of interest that relate to the new volume, may be mentioned the
following:—

 THE LEADING STORY of the year will be contributed by REV. ELIJAH
 KELLOGG, author of the celebrated _Speech of Spartacus to the
 Gladiators_, etc., and will be a vivid picture of the life of American
 boys and girls a century ago, preserving the history of customs
 and manners which are now forgotten or unknown, and enlivened with
 anecdote and incident.

 MRS. HARRIET BEECHER STOWE, after completing _Little Pussy Willow_,
 will continue her regular monthly contributions.

 “ROUND-THE-WORLD JOE,” the popular contributor to the old
 “Schoolmate,” has been engaged, and will furnish a series of articles
 of adventure and observation in foreign countries.

 BAYARD TAYLOR’S tales of distant lands will be continued.

 MRS. A. M. DIAZ has written several articles, of which one, _William
 Henry’s Letters to his Grandmother_, will be found especially
 entertaining.

 “AUNT FANNY” has supplied several stories which will be printed during
 the year.

 P. H. C. will give several more of his favorite _Lessons in Magic_,
 some of which will take up a different class of experiments from those
 that have been previously explained.

 MUSIC.—_Each number_ of the next volume will contain a song, composed
 expressly for “Our Young Folks.” These songs will be written by EMILY
 HUNTINGTON MILLER, and each will be especially adapted to the month in
 which it appears.

 Contributions will also be occasionally furnished by

  H. W. Longfellow,
  Capt. Mayne Reid,
  Rose Terry,
  E. Stuart Phelps,
  C. D. Shanly,
  J. H. A. Bone,
  “Carleton,”
  J. G. Whittier,
  T. B. Aldrich,
  Author of “Leslie Goldthwaite,”
  Horatio Alger, Jr.,
  Author of “Seven Little Sisters,”
  Mary N. Prescot,
  Louise C. Chollet,
  J. Warren Newcomb, Jr.
  Kate Putnam,
  Jane R. Austin,
  C. D. Gardette,
  Julia C. R. Dorr,

 and other well known and favorite writers.

 The department of ILLUSTRATION will remain under the supervision of
 Mr. A. V. S. ANTHONY, and the Publishers will spare neither trouble
 nor expense in giving the best pictures which can be obtained.
 _Full-page Engravings_ from designs by Artists of the first estimation
 will be given regularly, and _Colored Illustrations_ will be
 frequently supplied.

 =Terms of Our Young Folks.=—SINGLE SUBSCRIPTIONS.—Two Dollars a
 year. Single Numbers, Twenty Cents. CLUBS.—Three Copies for Five
 Dollars; Five Copies for Eight Dollars; Ten Copies for Fifteen
 Dollars; Twenty Copies for Thirty Dollars; and an extra copy _gratis_
 to the person forming the Club of Twenty.

 Specimen Numbers sent to any address on receipt of Twenty Cents.

 All letters respecting the Magazine should be addressed to the
 Publishers,

  TICKNOR & FIELDS,
  _124 Tremont Street, Boston_.







